Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPlans The Adrienne Tigard, Oregon am. # „4 • 400, I I 6\ s� r 1 • I 1 III i, SY 7148 SW Gonzaga Street Tigard, OR 97223 Project Manual Project No. 1310 Issue Date: 8/1/2013 30-Pt —Gz37_22s' City of Tigard AID. eve. Plans L.,/ By Ail Date 111 /3 OFFICE COPY S1E A SCOTT EDWARDS ARCHITECTURE LLP PROJECT DIRECTORY The Adrienne Tigard, OR OWNER: Roy Rogers 12700 SW 72nd Ave. Tigard, OR 97223 Attn: Roy Rogers Ph: (503) 620-2632 ARCHITECT: Scott I Edwards Architecture L.L.P. 2525 E Burnside Street Portland, OR 97214 Attn: Brian Mares Ph: (503) 226-3617 Fax: (503) 226-3715 CONTRACTOR: Centrex Construction 8250 Hunziker St. Tigard, OR 97223 Attn: Steve Leasure Ph: (503) ?? STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: KPFF Consulting Engineers 111 SW 5th Ave., Suite 2500 Portland, OR 97204 Attn: Jerry Abdie Ph: (503) 227-3251 END OF SECTION PROJECT DIRECTORY - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 INDEX The Adrienne Tigard, OR DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 43 25 Pre-Bid Substitution Request Form DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS eS� 01 11 00 Summary of Work R H. M 01 25 00 Product Substitution '`'4 01 26 00 Modification Procedures : INDEX The Adrienne Tigard, OR 05 40 00 Light Gauge Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 17 00 Prefabricated Wood Joists & Beams 06 18 00 Glue Laminated Beams 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Custom Cabinetry DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 10 00 Below Grade Waterproofing 07 21 00 Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Resistive Barriers 07 42 13 Metal Siding 07 42 43 Composite Panel Siding 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding 07 54 00 Single-Ply Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 84 13 Through Penetration Firestopping 07 90 00 Sealants DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 00 Steel Doors & Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors & Frames 08 34 00 Access Doors 08 40 00 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Finished Hardware 08 80 00 Glass & Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 28 00 Fiber Reinforced Cement Board 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tile 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 64 00 Wood Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 68 00 Carpeting 09 90 00 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Identifying Plaques and Signage 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 30 00 Fireplaces 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 55 00 Mailboxes DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 Residential Appliances INDEX - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 INDEX The Adrienne Tigard, OR DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 21 00 Window Coverings 12 48 19 Entrance Floor Grating DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 20 00 Passenger Elevators DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Suppression Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Communications Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 00 00 Electronic Safety and Security Systems — Bidder Designed DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Not Used DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 14 13 Precast Concrete Pavers DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 46 13 Foundation Drainage Piping END OF SECTION INDEX - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 43 25 Pre-Bid Substitution Request Form SECTION 00 43 25 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: SCOTT I EDWARDS ARCHITECTURE, LLP 2525 E Burnside Street Portland, Oregon 97214 Email: andrew @seallp.com All pre-bid substitution requests shall be submitted in either PDF format via email — or- by hard copy via mail/delivery to the address listed above. PROJECT: The Adrienne We hereby submit for your consideration the Product described below as a substitute for the specified product indicated: (See also Section 01 25 00 for additional information) 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT: Name: Section: Paragraph: 2. PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: a. Brand Name: b. Model/Catalog No: c. Manufacturer: d. [address/city/state/zip code] [phone] e. Nearest Distributor:: [address/city/state/zip code] [phone] f. Substitute product affects adjacent Work in the following way: 3. SUPPORTING DATA: a. Attached data included product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request: applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. SECTION 00 43 25 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 00 43 25 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM b. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. 4. CERTIFICATION The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct: a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. b. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. c. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on the other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. d. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. e. The proposed substitution meets or exceeds the requirements established by the referenced specifications and/or the product specified therein in all respects except at listed below: 5. SUBMITTED BY: Firm: [address / city/ state /zip code] Phone: [ ] Fax: [ ] By: Title: [please type or print] Signature: 6. ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION: Acceptable substitution items will be covered by an Addendum issued to all bidders. 7. ARCHITECT'S ACTION: The following is for use by the Architect: Accepted Accepted with exceptions as noted. Not Accepted Received after deadline. Remarks: By: Date: For: Scott I Edwards Architecture, LLP END OF SECTION SECTION 00 43 25 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 25 00 Product Substitution 01 26 00 Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Application for Payment 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 31 00 Coordination 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Schedules and Daily Reports 01 33 00 Submittals 01 33 50 Bidder Designed and Engineered Systems 01 42 16 Explanations and Definitions 01 42 19 Reference Specifications and Standards 01 43 00 Quality Assurance 01 45 00 Quality Control 01 56 00 Temporary Facilities & Security Controls 01 60 00 Materials and Equipment 01 61 16 Special Requirements — Sustainable Building Practices 01 71 23 Field Engineering 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 01 77 00 Contract Closeout 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 Warranties 01 78 39 Project Record Documents SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Adrienne project located in Tigard, Oregon consists of construction of a 11,336 sf, three-story mixed use building. The building is three-story, type V-B, fully sprinklered, steel and wood framed building and all associated site improvement information required to complete the building. The Work includes the furnishing of labor, materials, and equipment for the construction of all tenant improvements as described in the Drawings and Project Manual including, but not limited to general construction, HVAC, plumbing, electrical, fire protection systems, installation of all owner furnished/contractor installed items, and final connection of all equipment. B. The Contractor's scope of work shall include all permits, licenses, labor, materials, equipment, and related expenses necessary to complete the Project to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Architect, all governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and all Utilities serving the Project except: 1. The Owner or his representative will file the General Building Construction Documents with the required building department and pay for their plans review and the General Building permit and General Systems development assessments. a. General Systems assessments refers to jurisdictional charges levied to a project for general community development and not related to work specific to the project site. Project specific Work or fees such as water meter fees, tap fees, utility extensions, road improvements or other similar work, required by the jurisdiction or serving utility, are the responsibility of the Contractor under this Contract. b. All sub-trade plans review and permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor under this Contract. C. All project work as outlined in the Contract Documents, which includes but is not limited to general construction and coordination with installation of all owner furnished items as specified in this Section. D. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. Refer to Section 01 33 50. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Conditions Division 0 B. General Requirements Division 1 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Safety Requirements: 1. Associated General Contractor's of America, Inc. "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction", Workman's Compensation Board "Safety Code for Construction Work", Oregon State Employment Act Safety Requirements, and the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requirements, as applicable, apply to Work specified herein. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES SECTION 01 11 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Contractor shall coordinate with, and receive prior authorization from, the Owner for use of the site. It is intended that the Contractor shall have unlimited use of the Project Site for the duration of the Project Work except: 1. Work hours shall abide by all local jurisdiction noise and construction ordinances. B. Contractor shall secure any authorization as required from local transportation authorities for hauling, diversions and/or temporary closure of public right of ways required for completion of the Work. C. Procure use of additional storage and work areas as required. D. Premises shall not be used for wasting or disposal of any material not specifically shown or specified by the Contract Documents to be reused on site. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A pre-construction conference shall be held at a time and place as prescribed by the Architect after the Contract is awarded and before issuance of the Notice to Proceed. At the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a schedule for progress of the project. In addition to the Prime Contractor, all major Sub-contractors will be required to attend the pre- construction conference. All Contractors (Prime and Subs) shall each provide the names and phone numbers of at least two contacts that can make decisions in case of an emergency. 1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. Hazardous materials are not known to exist at this project site. B. The Contractor is solely responsible to properly protect workers. If the Contractor suspects any additional materials within the work area contain hazardous materials, notify the Owner and architect to allow arrangements to be made for their safe removal prior to execution of work under this Contract. 1.7 WORK BY OWNER A. Work by Owner: 1. The following general items will be provided by the Owner, or the Owner's independent vendor or contractor. The Contractor shall anticipate, and in some cases, coordinate and/or provide installation for Work by Owner: a. See Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 11 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 25 00 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section establishes the evaluation parameters and procedures for product substitutions for this project. 1.2 GENERAL A. Architect will be initial judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution, working with the Owner. B. Only approved substitutions may be used on Contract Work. C. Each request for substitution approval shall include: 1. Identity of product for which substitution is requested; include Specification Section and paragraph number. 2. Identity of substitution; include complete product description, drawings, photographs, performance and test data, and any other information necessary for evaluation. 3. Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. 4. Changes in other Work required because of substitution. 5. Effect on Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Cost of proposed substitution compared with specified product. 7. Any required license fees or royalties. 8. Availability of maintenance service. 9. Source of replacement materials. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD A. No request for substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted on the Substitution Request Form, and has been received by Architect at least seven (7) calendar days prior to bid opening. B. Requests submitted will not be individually acknowledged. C. Architect will issue Addenda prior to bid opening listing all approved substitutions. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD A. Approval will be granted only when: 1. Specified product cannot be delivered without Project delay; or, 2. Specified product has been discontinued; or, 3. Specified product has been replaced by superior product; or, 4. Specified product cannot be guaranteed as specified; or, 5. Specified product will not perform properly; or, 6. Specified product will not fit within designated space; or, 7. Specified product does not comply with governing codes; and, 8. Substitution will be clearly in Owner's interest. B. Architect will issue Change Order authorizing approved substitutions and revising Contract sum when appropriate. 1.5 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE A. Substitution approval does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper execution of the Work and for compliance with other Contract requirements. 1. The listing of a manufacturer or, manufacturer's series of products, as acceptable does not imply automatic approval of individual items of the manufacturer. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that SECTION 01 25 00-1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 01 25 00 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS any submittal made are for devices that meet or exceed the specifications included in this Project Manual or shown on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 25 00-2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the process and procedures involved in modifying the Contract Requirements. 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner will and Contractor shall identify who, within their respective organizations, will be responsible for executing Change Orders. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Conditions See Division 0 B. Supplemental General Conditions See Division 0 C. Submittals Section 01 33 00 D. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. Definition. 1. Means a written form submitted by the Contractor requesting additional information or clarification from the Architect on a portion of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor's Responsibility. 1. The Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested information is not available therein. Wherever possible, the Contractor shall provide an answer or suggested solution to the request. Where feasible, drawings or sketches should be used. RFI's shall be submitted on a form designated for that purpose and clearly state the project name and RFI sequential number. RFI's must be legible and able to be clearly reproduced through faxing. 2. Each RFI shall address only one issue. 3. The Contractor shall transmit a copy to the Owner and the Architect. 4. The Contractor shall maintain a current master list of all RFIs. C. Subcontractor's or Supplier's Responsibility. 1. All RFI's regardless of origination shall be processed to the Architect through the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall log all RFI's, regardless of origination,with consistent sequential numbering. The General Contractor shall first attempt to answer the RFI. If unable to answer the RFI, it can then be forwarded to the Architect. D. Architect's Responsibility. 1. The Architect may elect not to answer RFI's which request information readily available in the Contract Documents. The Architect shall have fourteen (14) calendar days from the date of receipt to respond to the Contractor. E. Contractor's Additional Responsibility. 1. If the Contractor believes that the Architect's response to an RFI will result in a modification to the Contract amount or time, the Contractor will consider the response a Construction Change Proposal (CCP) request. 1.5 ARCHITECTS SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI) OR REVISION (REV) SECTION 01 26 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURE A. Definition. 1. Means written, instruction,or interpretation to Contractor, executed in a form designated by Architect, and signed by Architect, which authorizes minor changes in Work not altering Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 2. Unless issued specifically as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), all ASI's or REV's are to be considered Construction Change Proposal (CCP) requests if, in the Contractor's opinion, they will constitute a change in either Contract amount or time. B. Contractor's responsibility. 1. The Contractor shall review and distribute all ASI's or REV's to all affected subcontractor's and suppliers. 2. The Contractor shall maintain a master list of all received ASI's or REV's with the Contract Documents stating the ASI/REV number, date received, and status and, review this list at each project meeting. 3 If the Contractor believes that the ASI or REV will require a modification to the Contract amount or time, the Contractor will immediately initiate it as a Construction Change Proposal (CCP) request. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE PROPOSAL (CCP) A. Definition. 1. Means a written proposal prepared by the Contractor for changes to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for proposed change to the Work. B. Proposals will include: 1. Detailed description of change, including change location and products. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. When appropriate, projected time span for making change, and specific statement as to whether or not overtime work is authorized. 4. When appropriate, specific time period during which requested price will be considered valid. C. Such proposals are for information only, and is not an instruction or authorization to execute the change or an order to stop Work in progress. D. Contractor's responsibility. 1. The Contractor shall provide sufficient quantitative data as may be required by the Architect and Owner to substantiate all proposed changes to the Contract amount. Justify each change in Contract time in accordance with Section 01310 - Construction Schedule. 2. The Contractor shall maintain a master list of all CCP's with the Contract Documents stating the CCP sequential number, date received, and status and, review this list at each project meeting. 3. Each Construction Change Proposal shall address only one issue. E. Architect's Responsibility. 1. Upon receipt, the architect will review the CCP and make recommendations to the Owner. F. Owner's Responsibility. 1. Within a timely period after receiving the CCP, the Owner shall review and either reject or approve the proposed changes to the Contract amount and/or time. G. Inclusion in Change Order. 1. If the CCP is approved by the Owner, the items approved shall be included in the next Change Order. SECTION 01 26 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A. Definition. 1. See General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. In lieu of or in addition to Proposal Request, Architect, with the Owner's approval signature thereon, may issue a written Construction Change Directive for Contractor to proceed with change for subsequent inclusion in future Change Order. C. Construction Change Directive will describe Work changes with proposed basis for adjustment in Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. D. The Owner will sign and date Construction Change Directive as authorization for Contractor to proceed with changes. E. The Contractor shall, if he concurs, sign and date Construction Change Directive to indicate agreement with specified terms. F. The Contractor shall provide final quotation of changes in Contract Sum and/or Contract Time within fourteen (14)days of the completion of the authorized work. 1.8 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDERS (CO) A. Definition. 1. See General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. General: 1. The Contractor will prepare each Change Order in quadruplicate for signature by Contractor, Owner and Architect. 2. Change Order will describe Work changes with attachments of any revised Contract Documents, which define details of change. 3. Change Order will adjust Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 4. Work covered by a Change Order is authorized to begin only after signature by Contractor, Owner and Architect. 5. Approved Change Orders shall be included on next monthly Payment Request. 6. The Contractor shall maintain a master list of all Change Orders with the Contract Documents stating the C.O. number, date, and status and, review this list at each project meeting. C. LUMP-SUM/CHANGE ORDERS 1. Change Order contents will be based on either agreed Construction Change Directive or: a. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive proposal as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. b. Contractor's change proposal as recommended by Architect,and as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. D. UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDERS 1. Change Order contents will be based on either agreed Construction Change Directive or: a. Architect's definition of required changes. b. Contractor's change proposal as recommended by Architect. c. Survey of completed work. 2. Unit Price amounts shall be either: a. Those stated on Bid Form or in Agreement, if any. b. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. SECTION 01 26 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 3. When quantities of items affected by Change Order can be determined prior to start of work: a. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with changes. b. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with specified terms. E. TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDERS 1. Owner will issue Construction Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed with changes. 2. Within fourteen (14) days of completion of change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting of change with supporting data. 3. Architect will determine allowable cost of such work, as provided in Contract General Conditions. 4. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 5. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement with specified terms. F. CORRELATION OF CHANGE ORDERS WITH CONTRACTOR'S OTHER SUBMITTALS 1. Upon approval of a Change Order: a. Revise Schedule of Values and subsequent Application for Payment forms to record each change as separate item of work, and to record adjusted Contract Sum. b. Revise construction schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. 2. Upon completion of Change Order Work, record pertinent changes in record documents. 1.9 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support quotation of each Unit Price proposal, which has not been previously established, and each lump sum proposal with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation. 1. With each quotation, submit the following cost and time data: a. Labor required b. Equipment required c. Products required 1) Quantity required, Purchase source, Unit cost d. Taxes, insurance, and bonds e. Credit for deleted work, similarly documented. f. Overhead and profit. g. Justification for any change in Contract Time. B. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on time-and-material basis with documentation as required for lump-sum proposal, plus the following information. a. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of order. b. Dates and times of work performed, and by whom. c. Time records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly rates. d. Receipts and invoices for the following: 1) Equipment used, including dates and time of use. SECTION 01 26 00 -4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 2) Products used, including quantities. 3) Subcontracts C. Document requests for product substitutions as specified in Section 01630. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 26 00 - 5 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section describes the process and procedures for applying for payment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Modification Procedures Section 01 26 00 C. Submittals Section 01 33 00 D. Materials & Equipment Section 01 60 00 E. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.3 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment. B. Application for payment line items should correspond to items listed on Schedule of Values in Section 01 29 73. 1.4 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information. 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. 3. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of contracting firm. B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Identify each major item of work by number and title matching those listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 2. Fill in scheduled dollar value for each item. 3. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. 4. Round off values to nearest dollar. 5. List each Change Order, executed prior to date of submission, at end of continuation sheets. Include Change Order number and brief description. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR PAYMENT A. After the first request for payment, each subsequent request shall be accompanied by a notarized affidavit stating that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid less earned retainage as their interests appeared in the last payment received. B. No application for payment by the Contractor shall be processed unless accompanied by the affidavit. 1.6 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. Submit, when requested by Architect, backup information to justify line item amounts. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Include Application number and date, and line item by number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.7 PAYMENT FOR PRODUCTS STORED OFF THE PROJECT SITE A. When delay or added cost to Owner can be avoided by storing products off site, Owner may make payment to Contractor for said products provided that Contractor shall: SECTION 01 29 00-1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 1. Locate storage facilities within 50 miles of project site, or within 50 miles of Architect's office. 2. Make storage facilities available for Architect's visual inspection. 3. Segregate and label stored products for specified project. 4. Assume all risk for loss. 5. Assume responsibility for exceeding product "shelf life". 6. Protect stored products and provide applicable insurance against their damage, discoloration, and theft, listing the Owner and any mortgagee as additional named insured. 7. Submit itemized inventory and Schedule of Values for stored products together with Certificate of Insurance. 8. Submit payment requests to Owner as part of Contractor's regular progress payment request. 9. Reimburse Owner for damages sustained if stored products are not delivered to jobsite when needed. 10. Submit to Owner, with copy to Architect, a written waiver of lien insuring Owner against claims for unpaid storage costs. 11. Upon receipt of payment from Owner prepare and issue to Owner with a copy for Architect and any mortgagee, a bill-of-sale for stored products. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 29 00-2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section outlines the requirements for the Schedule of Values for this project. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Modification Procedures Section 01 26 00 B. Application for Payment Section 01 29 00 1.3 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Type Schedule on AIA Document G703, Application for Payment, Continuation Sheet. 1.4 SCHEDULE HEADINGS A. Submit, as indicated in subparagraphs 1 and 2 below, separate schedules for the building sitework. 1. Identify each major work item by number and title matching those listed in table of contents of this Project Manual. 2. Coordinate headings with Construction Progress Schedule. 1.5 CONTENT A. As basis for computing progress payment values, separately list installed value of each of the following: 1. Each major work item. 2. Each subcontracted work item. For each major subcontract, list products and operations of that subcontract as separate line items. 3. Cash allowances in specified monetary amount of each allowance. 4. Any products to be stored, for which separate payments will be requested. B. Include directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit in component listing. C. Round off values to nearest dollar. D. Sum of values listed shall equal total Contract Sum. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit 3 copies of Schedule within 15 working days following Contract award. B. Form and content shall be acceptable to Architect and Owner. 1.7 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When requested by Architect, submit justifying substantiating data and line item amounts in question. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 29 73-1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 01 31 00 COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 D. Temporary Facilities Section 01 56 00 E. Materials and Methods Section 01 60 00 F. Cutting and Patching Section 01 73 29 G. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Coordinate Project Manual with Drawings to insure all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for the project completion are included. Failure of any Contractor or Subcontractor to fully acquaint themselves with both the Drawings and Project Manual requirements shall not relieve them from performing the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretations. Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise. B. All materials to be new, free from defects in bearing strength, durability, or appearance, of best commercial quality for purpose specified. C. Adequately protect active utilities from damage and remove or relocate as indicated or specified. Remove and plug or cap inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during the work. If not specified or otherwise provided, cap such utility lines at least three feet outside of new buildings or as required by local regulations. 1.4 COORDINATING WORK WITH WORK OF OTHERS A. Coordinate and make certain that where work of either party is dependent upon the other party, the work first performed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished as required to permit the proper installation of the following work. B. If the other work in any way interferes with the Contractor's work so notify the other party sufficiently in advance so that the other party has reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. C. If the Contractor's work in any way interferes with the other party's work, so notify the other party as soon as possible. The Contractor shall modify its schedule as reasonably necessary to accommodate the other party's work. 1.5 CLOSE-OUT DUTIES A. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Start-up: 1. Coordinate check-out of utilities, operational systems, and equipment. 2 Verify full operation of all systems as designed. 3. Assist in initial start-up and testing. B. At completion of work of each sub-contract, conduct inspection to assure that: 1. Work is acceptable. 2. Specified cleaning has been accomplished. SECTION 01 31 00-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 31 00 COORDINATION 3. Temporary facilities and debris have been removed from site. C. Substantial Completion: 1. Conduct inspection and prepare list of work to be completed or corrected. 2. Assist Architect in inspection. 3. Supervise correction and completion of work as established in Architect's inspection reports. D. Final Completion: 1. Assist Architect in inspection. 2. Contractor is responsible to obtain and post a Certificate of Occupancy from the permit jurisdiction prior to final completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 31 00-2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section describes the meeting requirements for this project. 1.2 GENERAL A. Owner's Representative or Architect will schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting. B. The Contractor will schedule and administer weekly progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work, and will: 1. Prepare meeting agenda. 2. Distribute notice of each specially called meeting, four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 3 days after each meeting to: a. All meeting participants b. Architect c. Owner's Representative C. Contractor shall make physical arrangements for meetings. D. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Modification Procedures Section 01 26 00 B. Schedule of Values Section 01 29 73 C. Construction Schedules and Reports Section 01 32 00 D. Submittals Section 01 33 00 E. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. A Preconstruction Meeting will be scheduled by Owner's Representative or Architect within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: Central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Owner's Representative. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Architect 3. Contractor's Superintendent and Project Manager. 4. Others as appropriate D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected construction schedules c. Cash flow projection d. Proposed schedule of values 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination. SECTION 01 31 19-1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 5. Designation of responsible personnel. 6. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment 7. Adequacy of Contract Documents distribution. 8. Procedures for maintaining record documents 9. Use of premises: a. Office, work, and storage areas b. Owner's requirements 10. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. 11. Temporary utilities 12. Safety and first-aid procedures. 13. Hazardous materials 14. Security procedures 15. Housekeeping procedures. E. Contractor shall record discussion and distribute to all attendees. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Weekly meetings shall be held at the jobsite to coordinate the Work, answer questions, and resolve problems. B. The following shall attend: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Architect, attending on a monthly (once per month) basis. 3. Architect's professional consultants as required by progress of Work 4. General Contractor's Superintendent, Project Engineer, and Project Manager. C. Others with interest in Project may attend and shall attend when invited. D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review and approval of previous meeting minutes. 2. Review Work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. a. 3-week schedule, submitted weekly 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards; expedite as required. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other Project Contracts. 14. Other business. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES SECTION 01 31 19-2 The Adrienne-Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS A. When specified in individual specification section, Contractor will: 1. Convene pre-installation conference at Project site prior to commencing work. 2. Require attendance: a. Contractor. b. Representative of each trade specified. c. Architect. d. Owner's Representative. 3. Notify Architect and Owner's Representative at least five days in advance of meeting date. 4. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and within three days after conference distribute copies of minutes to participants, with two copies to Architect. 5. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, compliance with manufacturer's instructions, and coordination with related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 31 19-3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND DAILY REPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section describes the requirements for construction schedules and reports for this project. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS A. Concurrently with the execution of the Construction Contract, submit estimated progress schedules for the Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the schedule's progress. B. Revise schedules when appropriate. C. If Contractor fails to deliver Schedule on time or to properly update Schedule, Architect may withhold Progress Payment approval until such time as Contractor complies with these requirements. D. If, in Architect's or Owner's opinion, Work progress falls behind approved Schedule, Contractor shall take necessary action to regain lost time. Contractor shall increase Work amount, or number of shifts, or establish overtime operations, or all three, and submit for review Schedule revisions in which progress rate will be regained, all without additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor's failure to comply with these requirements shall be grounds for determination that Contractor is not prosecuting Work with such diligence as will insure Project completion within specified time. Upon such determination Owner may terminate Contractor's right to proceed with Work,or any separable part thereof, in accordance with General Conditions. F. The Contractor and all sub-contractors, suppliers,and manufacturers shall schedule material deliveries and installations to conform with the Schedule, and provisions to this effect shall be included in all Subcontracts. G. Float Time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date, or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date, of an activity or a chain of activities on the critical path of construction activities for the Work. Float Time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the Owner. However, if Float Time associated to one of the activities is used up (but not exceeded), first by either the Owner or the Contractor (or by a combination of each), no additional time will be given to the Contractor. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 C. Submittals Section 01 33 00 1.4 SCHEDULES A. Forms: 1. For Contractor's Construction Progress: Critical Path Method(CPM)chart. 2. For Submittals, etc.: Include in Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule. B. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. C. Scale and spacing: Allow space for notations and future revisions. D. Headings: Include separate heading for each specification section title and section number listed in Project Manual Table of Contents. 1.5 SCHEDULE CONTENTS SECTION 01 32 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND DAILY REPORTS A. Contractor's Construction Progress SECTION 01 Sched32 00 ule: 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show dates for beginning, and completion, of each major element of Work. 3. Maximum length of scheduled activity: as required per CPM. B. Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: 1. Show dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. Show dates submittals will be required for Owner-furnished products. 3. Show dates approved submittals will be required from the Architect. Allow a reasonable amount of time for Architect and Architect=s consultants review. C. Products Delivery Schedule: 1. Show delivery dates for products furnished by Owner. 1.6 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity up to date of each Schedule submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous Schedule submission. 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and related impact on Schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and expected effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other Prime Contractors. 1.7 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction log, recording the following information concerning events at the site. 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Emergency procedures. 9. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 10. Change Orders received, implemented. 11. Services connected, disconnected. 12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 13. Partial Completions, occupancies. 14. Substantial Completions authorized. 1.8 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit project schedule at execution of Contract for Construction. B. Submit revised Schedules with each Application for Payment. C. Submit two approved opaque copies of each submission for Architect's permanent use; submit one approved opaque copy to Owner's Representative. D. Submit duplicate copies of Daily Construction Reports to Architect and to Owner's Representative at weekly Progress Meeting. SECTION 01 32 00 - 2 The Adrienne - Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND DAILY REPORTS 1.9 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to: 1. Jobsite file 2. Subcontractors 3. Architect 4. Owner's Representative 5. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 32 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the requirements for submittals for this project. The Architect will be obligated to review only those submittals required by the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Definitions and additional requirements, see Division 1. 1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Contractor's Review a. Contractor will identify shop drawing details by reference to specification section, drawing sheet, detail, schedule, or room number shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Shop Drawing Sheet Size: a. 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 11 x 17 inch, 24 x 36 inch, or 30 x 42 inch. b. Do not mix sheet sizes with an individual submittal. B. Product Data: 1. Contractor's Review a. Contractor will identify product data submittals by reference to specification section, drawing sheet, detail, schedule, or room number shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Product Data Sheet Size: a. 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 11 x 17 inch, 24 x 36 inch, or 30 x 42 inch. b. Do not mix sheet sizes with an individual submittal. 3. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products. 4. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 5. Show dimensions and required clearances. 6. Show wiring and piping diagrams, and controls. 7. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a. Modify to delete information not applicable to Work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to Work. C. Samples: 1. Contractor's Review a. Contractor will identify samples by reference to specification section, drawing sheet, detail, schedule, or room number shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Size and Quantity: See respective specification sections. 3. Show full range of color, texture and pattern. 4. Deliver to Architect's office, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. SECTION 01 33 00 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. Comply with Contract Documents. D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work. E. Notify Architect in writing, at submission time, of any deviations in submittals from Contract Document requirements. F. Perform no Work or fabrication requiring submittal until return of submittal with Architect's or Engineer's stamp indicating 'No Exceptions Taken' or "Make Corrections Noted. 1.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals in such sequence as to cause no Work delay. B. Submission methods: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit digital PDF files via email to Architect. Reviewed documents will be returned to Contractor via email. 2. Product Data: a. Submit digital PDF files via email to Architect. Reviewed documents will be returned to Contractor via email. 3. Samples: a. Submit physical samples in number stated in respective specification section. C. Submitted documents and samples shall be of sufficient size to clearly illustrate: 1. Project title and names of Contractor, supplier, and manufacturer, all visible when drawings are folded. 2. Project identification complete with specification section number. 3. Field measurements, clearly identified as such. 4. Applicable Standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Identification of resubmittal revisions. 7. At least 6 x 8 inch space on each page for Contractor's and Architect's stamps. 8. Contractor's stamp, signed and certifying that products, field measurements, field construction criteria, and information submitted has been reviewed and accepted by Contractor as accurate and conforming with Contract Documents. 9. Date for submittal to be reviewed and returned, with indication of priority. 10. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 1.7 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit until approved. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Identify any changes made other than those requested by Architect. C. Samples: 1. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. D. Cost of Additional Review: 1. Costs for third review and subsequent reviews of submittals will be SECTION 01 33 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS payable by Contractor. 1.8 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. If multiple submittals or significantly large submittals are requested, the Architect will consult with Contractor regarding the establishment of prioritization of these submittals. B. Affix signatures and indicate approval, or requirements for resubmittal. C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 33 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 33 50 BIDDER DESIGNED AND ENGINEERED SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Bidder designed and engineered systems are defined as complete, operational systems, designed, engineered, provided and integrated into the overall project for their intended use. B. Bidder design and engineered components are defined as individual components or elements that are part of a specified system that require design and/or engineering as required to provide and integrate into the overall project for their intended use. C. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor is responsible to coordinate and assume or assign to Subcontractors complete responsibility for design, contract documents, calculations, submittals, permits, fabrication, transportation and installation. 1. Contractor is responsible to submit and coordinate Bidder Design documents to Permit Jurisdiction for separate permit and/or inclusion under general building permit per deferred submittal procedures as required by IBC section 106.3.4.2 2. Bidder Designed and Engineered Systems shall include all design, coordination with primary building design and architect/engineer of record intent, Contract Documents, calculations, submittals, permits, fabrication, transportation and installation. 3. Bidder Designed and Engineered Components shall include design, coordination with primary building design and architect/engineer of record intent, Contract Documents, calculations, submittals, permits, fabrication, transportation and installation. 1.4 ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF RECORD A. The overall building's primary architect and engineer is the Architect or Engineer of Record for the building as referred to in IBC section 106.3.4.2. 1. The Architect or Engineer of Record's review of Bidder Designed submittals shall be for design intent and shall not lessen nor shift responsibility from Contractor or assigned Subcontractor, to Owner nor Architect or Engineer of Record. 2. The Owner is not responsible to pay for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by Contractor or Subcontractor to coordinate their work with the work of other trades on Project or to provide Bidder Designed work in a timely manner to meet project schedule. 1.5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 33 50 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 33 50 BIDDER DESIGNED AND ENGINEERED SYSTEMS A. Bidder Designed systems or components shown in Contract Documents produced by the Architect and/or Engineer of Record are shown for design intent. B. Intent is to have Bidder Design Entity responsible to design, provide, coordinate and install Bidder Designed system or components. C. Bidder Designed components attached to structural frame or supplemental to structural frame shall be designed for anticipated loads outlined on structural drawings or found in prevailing building code. D. Load reactions at interface between Bidder Designed components and structural frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by Engineer of Record. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00, IBC Section 106.3.4.2., and each individual specification section for Bidder Designed systems and components. B. At a minimum, Bidder Design and Engineered submittals are required to include: 1. Complete criteria 2. Design assumptions 3. Detail drawings technically describing system components. 4. Calculations. 5. Stamped by Bidder Designed system Engineer registered in project state. 6. Instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with other trades. 7. Applicable ICC/ICBO, UL, FM or other independent testing and/or trade listing as required by permit jurisdiction and/or architect or engineer of record. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Bidder Designed Systems: A. See Cover Sheet of Drawings. 2.2 Bidder Designed Components: A. See individual specification sections of this Project Manual. PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 33 50 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 16 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings, general provisions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of the Specification language constitutes specific definitions for nominal terms found on the Drawings and in other Contract Documents. Certain terms used repetitiously through-out the Contract Documents are hereby defined as follows: 1. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of the Division 1 sections. The General Requirements apply to the entire work of the Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements of work which are included in the Project. 2. Indicated: a. The term "Indicated" is a cross reference to details, notes or schedules on the drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. b. Where terms such as "shown", "noted" and "scheduled" are used, it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended, except as specifically noted. 3. Directed, Requested, Etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. 4. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or his sub- contractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. 5. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing the work as part of the Project. The extent of the project site is shown on the Drawings. 6. Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the Work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and interpret the results of those inspections or tests. See Section 01 45 00. 7. Approve: a. Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term "approved" will be held to the following limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties: Review of submittals is only for general conformance with SECTION 01 42 16-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 16 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The review does not affect the Contractor's responsibility to perform all Construction Contract requirements with no change in contract price or time. Any action shown by the Architect is subject to the requirements of the plans, specifications and other Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to confirm and correlate dimensions at the site, for information that pertains to the fabrication processes, for the means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences and quantities necessary to complete the Construction Contract and for coordination of the work of all trades and satisfactory performance of its work. The review by the Architect is undertaken solely to satisfy Architect's obligations, if any, to the Owner and shall not give rise to any claim by the Contractor or other parties against the Architect or Owner. b. In no case will "approval" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of the Contractor for responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. 8. Extra Work: An item of work not provided for in the Contract as awarded but determined by the Architect as essential to the proper completion of the Contract within its intended scope. 9. Extra Work Order: A Change Order concerning the performance of work or furnishing of materials involving extra work. 10. Plans: The approved plans, profiles, typical cross sections, working drawings and supplemental drawings, or exact reproductions thereof, which show the location, character, dimensions and details of the Work to be done or contemplated under the Contract. 11. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for installation. 12. Provide: Except to the extent further defined, the term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1.3 SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS: A. General: This series of explanations is provided to assist the user of these Specifications and associated Contract Documents to more readily understand the format, language, implied requirements and similar conventions of the content. None of these explanations will be interpreted to modify the substance of the requirements. B. Format Explanations: The format of the principal portions of Specifications can be described as follows, although other portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or non-compliance: 1. Titles: The Specifications are divided into Divisions, sub-divisions and Sections for convenience. The titles of these are not intended to imply a particular meaning or to fully describe the Work of each Division, sub- division or Section, and are not an integral part of the text which specifies the requirements. 2. Each Section of Specification has been sub-divided into 3 "parts" for SECTION 01 42 16-2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 16 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS uniformity and convenience (Part 1 - General, Part 2- Products, and Part 3 - Execution). These do not limit the meaning of and are not an integral part of the text which specifies requirements. 3. Imperative language is frequently used. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. 4. Section Numbering: Used to facilitate cross references in the Contract Documents. The Sections are bound in numerical sequence; however, this sequence is not complete and the Table of Contents of the Specifications must be consulted to determine the numbers and names of specification sections in the Contract Documents. 5. The pages of each Section are numbered independently for each Section. The Section number is shown with the page number at the bottom of each page. 6. Paragraph numbers are in a self-explanatory format, and are purely for the purpose of facilitating subsequent references to specific text, for addenda, purchasing, sub-contracting, modifications, change orders, and similar references. 7. Project identification is recorded at the bottom of each page to minimize misuse of the Specifications and confusion with other project Specifications. C. Specification Content: Because of the methods by which this project Specification has been produced, certain conventions of the text and content can be explained as follows: 1. Overlapping and conflicting requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes two different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be also the most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the Contract Documents ( not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that the less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently-equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which of two levels of quality is the more stringent, to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as the minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, the indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 3. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, the specification text requires (or at least implies) that specific work be assigned to certain specialist or expert entities, who must be engaged for the performance or those units of work. These are specified as, and must be recognized as, special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with (and are not intended to SECTION 01 42 16-3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 16 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS interfere with) the normal application of regulations, union jurisdictions and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is to be recognized as the "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of requirements remains with the Contractor. 4. Trades, Names: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of trade titles such as "carpentry" in specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesman or the corresponding generic name (such as a carpenter), nor that the specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesmen of that corresponding generic name. 5. Abbreviations: a. The Specifications are of abbreviated or streamlined type and frequently include incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall", "shall be", "Contractor shall", and similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference in same manner as they are in a note on Drawings. b. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all", "each", and "every" and articles such as "the", "a", and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. c. Actual work abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been included in the text. These are generally defined in each Section at the first instance of use for each term so abbreviated. d. Trade associations and general standards are frequently abbreviated; refer to Section 01090 for a general listing of these abbreviations. e. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular wherever applicable and the full context of the requirement so indicates. 1.4 DRAWING EXPLANATIONS A. Wherever a detail is referenced and drawn to describe a specific condition, the same or a similar detail shall be used in identical or similar conditions elsewhere on the Project even if not specifically referenced. B. Where the word "similar" (sim) occurs on the Drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical. All details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with other parts of the Work. C. The figured or noted dimensions on the Drawings shall be used instead of measurements of the Drawings by scale, and shall be strictly complied with. D. No scale measurements of the Drawings shall be used as a dimension for any part of the work. 1.5 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Not withstanding the provisions of Division 0, the Drawings and Specifications are complementary; and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies between the two documents, the Contractor is responsible to obtaining clarification from the SECTION 01 42 16-4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 16 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Architect. The Architect will render an interpretation consistent with the intent of the documents as complementary. The Contractor shall assume that any interpretation may favor the more stringent version of the Work and shall be responsible therefore. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 42 16-5 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions 1.2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS A. For products or workmanship specified by referenced specification or standard, comply with requirements of the specification or standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing codes. B. Except where a specific date is specified, the date of the referenced specification or standard is that in effect as of the bid opening date. C. Obtain a copy of all referenced specifications and standards, and maintain at jobsite during the specific work until Substantial Completion of the Project. 1.3 REFERENCED REGULATORY AGENTS AA Aluminum Association 1525 Wilson Blvd., Suite 600 Arlington, VA, 22209 703-358-2960 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 550 Schaumburg, IL 60173 AASHTO American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials 444 North Capital Street, N.W. Suite 249 Washington, D.C. 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute 38800 Country Club Drive Farmington Hills, MI 48331 ADAAG (ADA) Americans With Disability Act Federal Register 28 CFR part 36. See also state adopted amendments to UBC. AHA American Hardwood Association 1210 W. Northwest Hwy Palatine, IL 60067 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700 Chicago, IL 60601 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 25 Massachusetts Ave., NW Suite 800 Washington, DC 20001 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140 Centennial, CO 80112 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20875 ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association 1200 G Street, NW, Suite 800 Washington, DC 20005 ANSI American National Standards Institute SECTION 01 42 19-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS 25 West 43`d. Street New York, NY 10036 APA American Plywood Association 7011 S 19th Street Tacoma, WA 98466 APA Architectural Precast Association 6710 Winkler Rd., Suite 8 Fort Myers, FL 33919 ASA American Standards Association (Now known as ANSI: see above) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials 100 Barr Harbor Dr. West Conshohocken, PA 19428 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 46179 Westlake Dr., Suite 120 Potomac Falls, VA, 20165 AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association 3246 Fall Creek Hwy. Suite 1900 Grandbury, TX 76049 AWS American Welding Society 550 NW LeJeune Rd. Miami, FL 33126 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufactureres Association 355 Lexington Ave., 15th floor New York, NY 10017 BIA Brick Institute of America 1850 Centennial Park Dr., Suite 301 Reston, VA 20191 CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 1010 Jorie Blvd., Suite 30 Oak Brook, IL, 60523 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60173 CS Commercial Standards of the Commodities Division of the Department of Commerce U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 12061 West Jefferson Blvd. Culver City, CA 90230 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Dr., Suite 200 Chantilly, VA 20151 EIMA EIFS Industry Memebers Association 513 West Broad St., Suite 210 SECTION 01 42 19-2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS Falls Church, VA, 22046 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) FM Factory Mutual System 500 River Ridge Rd P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, MA, 02062 Fed Spec (FS) Federal Specifications of the United States General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section 470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 6525 Belcrest Rd., Suite 480 Hyattsville, MD, 20782 GANA Glass Association of North America 800 SW Jackson St., Suite 1500 Topeka, KS, 66612 HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association 1825 Michael Farraday Dr. P.O. Box 2789 Reston, VA 22190 IBC International Building Code ("I"-codes) See ICC ICBO International Conference of Building Officials See ICC ICC International Code Conference - Los Angeles Division 5360 South Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 IFC International Fire Code - See IBC IMC International Mechancial Code - See IBC LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED) (See USGBC) MIA Masonry Institute of America 22815 Frampton Ave Torrance, CA, 90501 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers 800 Roosevelt Rd., Bldg. C, Suite 312 Glen Ellyn, IL, 60137 NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters 85 John Street New York, BY 10017 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 111 Deer Lake Rd., Suite 100 Deerfield, IL, 60015 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturer's Association 60 Revere, Drive, Suite 500 Northbrook, IL 60062 NEC National Electric Code published by National Fire Protection Association (See NFPA below) SECTION 01 42 19-3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02169 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association O'Hara International Center 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 Rosemont, IL 60018 NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau 2825 Eastlake Ave., E Ste 350 Seattle, WA, 98102 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association 1400 E. Touchy Ave., G-54 Des Plaines, IL 60018 OAR Oregon Administrative Rules http://arcweb.sos.state.or.us/banners/rules.htm ORS Oregon Revised Statues www.led.state.or.us/ors OSBCA Oregon State Building Codes Agency 1535 Edgewater NW Salem, OR 97309 OSHD Oregon State Highway Division - Dept. of Transportation 329 Transportation Bldg. Salem, OR 97310 OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code. Oregon Amendments to IBC (see IBC below), published by State of Oregon. (see OSBCA above) PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Rd. Skokie, IL 60077 PCI Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute 200 W Adams St., Suite 2100 Chicago, IL 60606 PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America - Oregon 17675 SW Farmington Rd. Aloha, OR, 97007 PS Product Standard of National Bureau of Standards US Department of Commerce US Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25 Fox River Grove, IL 60021 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland, OH 44145 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 2400 SECTION 01 42 19-4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS Chicago, IL 60611 SJI Steel Joist Institute 234 W Cheves St Florence, SC, 29501 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 4201 Lafayette Center Cr. P.O. Box 112130 Chantilly, VA 20151 TCA Tile Council of America 100 Clemson Research Blvd. Anderson, SC 29625 U.B.C. Uniform Building Code (superceded- See IBC) U.B.C. Std Uniform Building Code Standards, Volume III, published by ICB (See U.B.C. above) UFC Uniform Fire Code (superceded- See IFC above) UMC Uniform Mechanical Code (superceded- See IMC above) USAS United States of American Standards Institute (Now known as ANSI: see above) USGBC United States Green Building Council www.usgbc.orq UL Underwriters Laboratories 2600 NW Lake Rd. Camas, WA, 98607 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97281 WH Warnock Hersey 8431 Murphy Drive Middleton, WI 53562 WMMP Wood Molding & Millwork Producers Association 507 First St. # B Woodland, CA 95695 WWPA Western Wood Products Association Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Ave. Suite 500 Portland, OR 97204 1.4 TRADE ASSOCIATION REFERENCES A. See also specific Specification Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 PRODUCTS NOT USED SECTION 01 42 19-5 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS END OF SECTION SECTION 01 42 19-6 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 43 00 QUAUTY ASSURANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall construct mockups as specified in this Section and/or elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.2 MOCKUP REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct pre-installation conference in conjunction with construction of mockup. See Section 01 31 19. B. Immediately following the pre-installation conference, construct complete, full- scale mockup, separate from the Work, demonstrating the specified anchorage devices, flashings, seals, etc. All attendees to be present for construction of the entire mockup. Mockup shall be constructed and reviewed prior to installation of WRB, windows, doors, roofing, and siding/cladding systems. 1. Include the following elements in the mockups: a. Exterior wall framing and sheathing. b. Weather barriers, opening and penetration flashing. c. Air barrier sealants and gasketing. d. Typical window, vent and pipe penetrations. e. Typical equipment/fixture mounting blocks. f. Rain screen spacers /drainage materials. g. Exterior finish materials - all types. h. Exterior wall insulation. C. Perform required tests under provisions identified in this section and identified in respective product specifications. D. Accepted mockups shall be the comparison standard for remaining Work. E. Remove mockup from project site on completion of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 43 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Independent testing and inspecting services are to be furnished as specified in this Section and/or elsewhere in these Specifications and structural notes on the drawings. B. The following testing and inspecting is required: Item Reference Concrete Reinforcing Section 03 20 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 Gypsum Concrete Underlayment Section 03 54 13 Structural Steel Section 05 12 00 Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00 Earthwork See Civil Notes on Civil Drawings Other Structural Notes, Permit Jurisdiction and other individual Sections of this Project Manual 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Requirements for testing may be described in various other sections of the Project Manual. 1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMENT FOR TESTING: A. Selection of testing laboratory: The Owner will select a pre-qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Payment for testing: The Owner will pay for laboratory testing and inspection services except as provided in paragraph 1.5A of this Section. 1.4 COORDINATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Contractor shall initiate and coordinate testing and inspections required by the Contract Documents and Public Authorities having jurisdiction of the work. B. Notification: The Contractor shall notify the Owner sufficiently in advance of the manufacture of materials or products to be supplied by him which, by requirements of the Contract Documents, must be tested at the source of supply in order that the Owner may arrange for the testing. C. The Contractor shall sequence work in a manner to efficiently utilize testing agency time and travel. 1. As part of the Contractor's obligation hereunder, the scheduling and sequencing of work requiring testing and inspection shall be done in a manner so as to minimize, to the greatest extent feasible, repeated trips to the project site or fabrication facility. 1.5 ALTERNATE INSPECTION SECTION 01 45 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Architect shall have the right to require alternative inspection procedure other than as specified, when, in the Architect's judgment, other inspections are required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract requirements. Costs of such alternative inspections will be borne by the Owner if products are found to comply; otherwise, costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Any assemblies which require re-testing due to non-compliance with Contract Documents or manufacturer's warranty requirements will be paid for by the Contractor. 1.6 REPORT DISTRIBUTION A. Email a PDF of each test result report, signed and certified by the testing firm's supervising engineer. Distribution shall be as follows: 1. Owner 2. Architect 3. Contractor 4. Building Department PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 45 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 56 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall provide at the jobsite: 1. Temporary power required for Work. 2. Temporary heating and cooling equipment required for Work. 3. Temporary ventilation equipment required for Work. 4. Temporary lighting required for Work. 5. Temporary restroom facilities. 6. Temporary 6 foot high wire mesh fence and gate around construction and staging areas. 7. Temporary dump boxes for waste disposal and material recycling. 8. Temporary fire extinguishers. 9. Temporary field office equipped with a computer, internet connection, telephone, first aid cabinet, shop drawing and sample storage, and minimum 4 foot long table top for drawing review. 10. Temporary buildings or trailers used for material and equipment storage with adequate ventilators, fire extinguishers, and temporary controls. 11. Temporary security and life safety controls per OSHA and permit jurisdiction standards. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Coordination Section 01 31 00 B. Field Engineering Section 01 71 23 C. Cutting and Patching Section 01 73 29 1.3 DISRUPTION REQUIREMENTS A. Do not block access or egress to property or adjacent R.O.W. without prior approval from landowner, tenants and jurisdiction. 1.4 TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS: A. Do not close or obstruct required traffic exit ways without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide alternate routes around closed and obstructed areas when required by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Obtain and pay all required parking/loading permits and fees. 1.5 DUST, NOISE & ODORS & LEAKAGE REQUIREMENTS: A. Dust and Leakage: 1. Provide effective dust and/or moisture barriers as required to avoid any contamination or damage to existing facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 01 56 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 56 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 3.1 COMPLETION A. Site Control Work: 1. Keep adjacent streets, parking areas, and loading areas clear. B. Removal of Temporary Facilities: 1. Remove temporary facilities upon completion of Work. 2. Restore exposed surfaces damaged by temporary facilities. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 56 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 60 00 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Materials and Equipment incorporated into Work shall: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quantity specified, unless otherwise approved in writing. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, and to be interchangeable. 2. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, and by same manufacturer. 3. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 4. Equipment shall comply with capacity, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified, unless otherwise approved in writing. C. Do not use materials or equipment for any purpose other than that for which designed or specified. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Product Substitutions Section 01 25 00 C. Submittals Section 01 33 00 D. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by referenced standard, select any product meeting standard. B. For products specified by naming several products, select any one complying with specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products and "or approved", select any one specified product or submit request for substitution as specified below. D. For products specified by naming one or more products without restricting the Contractor to use of these products only, select any one specified product or submit request for substitution as specified below. 1.5 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS & METHODS A. If Contractor believes that any specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use he shall, if possible, so notify Architect at least five (5) working days prior to bid opening, and if not possible such notice shall be given before performing Work in question. B. If notice of objection is not received within the time limits specified above, then Contractor agrees that the specified products, methods, and systems are appropriate for use on this Project. 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 01 25 00. SECTION 01 60 00-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 60 00 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT 1.7 QUANTITY OF PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Whenever in specifications a product is referred to in singular number, such reference shall include as many such products as are shown on Drawings or are required to complete the Work. 1.8 PRODUCTS LIST A. Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit to Architect complete list of major products proposed for use; include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and installing subcontractor's name. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not omit preparatory or installation procedures required by manufacturer, unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. C. When Contract Documents require Work to comply with manufacturer's instructions, obtain and distribute such instructions to parties performing work including two (2) copies to Architect. Maintain one (1) set at jobsite during installation and until acceptance. D. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformance with specified requirements. E. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult Architect for further instructions. F. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 1.10 TRANSPORTATION & HANDLING A. Arrange product deliveries in accord with Contractor's Construction Schedule; coordinate to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. B. Deliver products undamaged, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and with legible identifying labels intact. C. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with Contract Documents and approved submittals and, assure that products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.11 STORAGE & PROTECTION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain product identity labels intact. C. Store products subject to weather-damage in weathertight enclosures. D. Maintain storage room temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. E. Maintain reasonable protection against product theft and vandalism. F. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated products above ground, on blocking or skids; prevent product damage and discoloration. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. 3. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Inspection of Stored Products: 1. Arrange storage to permit easy access for inspection. SECTION 01 60 00-2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 01 60 00 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT 2. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained as specified and are free from damage, discoloration, and deterioration. H. Protection after Installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products against damage and discoloration. Remove covering when no longer needed. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 60 00-3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 61 16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS — SUSTAINABLE BUILDING PRACTICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative requirements and procedures for compliance and documentation for the project's Sustainable Building Practices. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Specific material requirements Division 2 through 16 1.3 REFERENCES A. Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD); 939 Ellis Street, San Francisco, California 94109. Tel: (415) 771-6000. www.baaqmd.gov. B. Bay Area Air Quality Management District: 1. BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51- Adhesive and Sealant Products. C. Green Seal; 1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 827, Washington, DC 20036- 5525. Tel: (202) 872-6400. Fax: (202) 872-4324. www.greenseal.orq. D. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD); 21865 E. Copley Drive, Diamond Bar, CA 91765. Tel: (909) 396-2000. www.aqmd.gov. E. Carpet and Rug Institute: CRI Green Label Testing Program 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Low emitting / Low toxic: Construction Materials and Methods that reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants through limitations of VOC levels and alternate methods of application or installation. See Part 2 - Products and specific specification sections for acceptable standards and methods. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Carbon compounds considered indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating, and/or harmful to the comfort and wellbeing of installers and occupants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Specific requirements for materials in respective Sections of Division 2 through 16. 2.2 VOC Limits: When available, all products used on this Project shall meet the following limitations for emission of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) (expressed as grams of VOC per liter, less water). A. Adhesives, Sealants and Sealant Primers: VOC content at or below levels allowed by South Coast Air Quality Management District (SMAQMD) Rule #1168. Caulks and Sealants: VOC content at of below levels allowed by Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD) Regulation 8, rule 51. Aerosol adhesives: VOC content at or below levels allowed by Green Seal Standard GC- 36. 1. Architectural Applications VOC Limit Indoor Carpet Adhesives 50g/liter. Carpet Pad Adhesives 50g/liter. Outdoor Carpet Adhesives 150g.liter. Wood Flooring Adhesives 100g/liter. Rubber Floor Adhesives 60g/liter. Subfloor Adhesives 50g/liter. SECTION 01 61 16 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 61 16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS — SUSTAINABLE BUILDING PRACTICES Ceramic Tile Adhesives 65g/liter. VCT & Asphalt Tile Adhesives 50g/liter Drywall & Panel Adhesives 50g/liter. Cove Base Adhesives 50g/liter. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives 70g/liter. Structural Glazing Adhesives 100g/liter. Single Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives 2508/liter. 2. Specialty Applications PVC Welding 5108/liter. CPVC Welding 490g/liter. ABS Welding 325g/liter. Plastic Cement Welding 250g/liter. Adhesive Primer for Plastic 550g/liter. Contact Adhesive 80g/liter. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250g/liter Structural Wood Member Adhesive 140g/liter. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Operations 850g/liter. Top & Trim Adhesive 250g/liter. 3. Substrate Specific Applications Metal to Metal 30g/liter. Plastic Foams 50g/liter. Porous Material (except wood) 50g/liter. Wood 30g/liter. Fiberglass 80g/liter. 4. Sealants Architectural 250g/liter. Nonmembrane Roof 300g/liter. Roadway 250g/liter. Single-Ply Roof Membrane 450g/liter. Other 4208/liter. 5. Sealant Primers Architectural Non Porous 250g/liter. Architectural Porous 775g/liter. Modified Bituminous 5008/liter. Other 750g/liter. 6. Aerosol Adhesives General purpose mist spray 65% VOCs by weight General purpose web spray 55% VOCs by weight Special purpose aerosol adhesives (all types)70% VOCs by weight B. Paints & Coatings: VOC content at or below levels allowed by Green Seal GS-11 Limits for Paints and Coatings, and Green Seal GS-47 Limits for Stains and Finishes. 1. Paints and Coatings excluding water and colorants added at the point-of- sale: VOC Limit Flat Topcoat <50g/liter. Non-Flat Topcoat <100g/liter. Primer or Undercoat <100g/liter. Floor Paint <100g/liter. Anti Corrosive Coating <250g/liter. SECTION 01 61 16 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 61 16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS — SUSTAINABLE BUILDING PRACTICES Reflective Wall Coating <50g/liter. Reflective Roof Coating <100g/liter. 2. Paints and Coatings including colorant added at the point-of-sale. Flat Topcoat <100g/liter. Non-Flat Topcoat <150g/liter. Primer or Undercoat <150g/liter. Floor Paint <150g/liter. Anti Corrosive Coating <300g/liter. Reflective Wall Coating <100g/liter. Reflective Roof Coating <150g/liter. 3. Stains and Finishes Finish: Varnishes <350g/liter. Finish: Conjugated Oil Varnish <450g/liter. Finish: Laquer <550g/liter. Finish: Clear Brushing Laquer <680g/liter. Finish: Shellacs/Pigmented <550g/liter. Finish: Shellacs/Clear <730g/liter. Stains <250g/liter. Sealer <200g/liter. Waterproof Sealers <250g/liter. Low Solids Coating <120g/liter. C. Flooring Systems: VOC content at or below levels allowed by Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label program for cushion. VOC content at or below levels allowed by Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus program for carpet and carpet adhesives. Emission factor limit (mg/m2/hr) 1. Carpets a. Total VOCs 0.5 b. 4 — Phenylcyclohexane 0.05 c. Formaldehyde 0.03 d. Styrene 0.41 2. Cushion a. Total VOCs 1 b. BHT 0.3 c. Formaldehyde 0.05 d. 4 — Phenylcyclohexane 0.05 3. Carpet Adhesives a. See Part 2.2.A of this Section. 4. Concrete, wood, bamboo and cork floor finishes a. See Part 2.2.B of this Section. 5. Tile setting adhesive and grout a. See Part 2.2.A of the Section. D. Composite Wood and Agrifiber products: Must contain no added urea- formaldehyde resins. PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED SECTION 01 61 16 -3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 61 16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS — SUSTAINABLE BUILDING PRACTICES END OF SECTION SECTION 01 61 16 - 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work under each Section of the Project Manual shall include providing, installing and maintaining all scaffold, staging, planking, temporary shoring and/or bracing barricades and other protection devices necessary for safety and in strict conformity with applicable laws and ordinances. The work also includes the maintenance of protection devices so as not to interfere with of obstruct the work of other trades. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work Section 01 11 00 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 D. Temporary Facilities Section 01 56 00 E. Materials and Methods Section 01 60 00 F. Cutting and Patching Section 01 73 29 G. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all necessary temporary or construction bracing, shoring or support for walls, floors or roof construction prior to completion of vertical and lateral bearing systems. B. The work under each Section of the Project Manual shall include providing all forms of protection as necessary to preserve the work of other trades and the public free from damage. These provisions shall be considered as though repeated under each separate Section of the Project Manual. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of and observe all safety requirements. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall be liable for the failure of the Contractor to observe and comply with required safety requirements. D. See Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work for additional requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 71 23 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Perform all cutting, fitting, and patching, including any attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete Work and to: 1. Make work fit properly together. 2. Integrate with other work. 3. Uncover work for installation of ill-timed work. 4. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 5. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 6. Provide penetrations through non-structural surfaces for mechanical and electrical work. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Coordination Section 01 31 00 B. Field Engineering Section 01 71 23 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products similar to those specified elsewhere in this Project Manual: 1. Follow those Specifications. B. Other Products: 1. Follow Architect's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Inspect existing conditions and identify work subject to damage or movement caused by proposed cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. C. Report unsatisfactory and questionable conditions to Architect. D. Do not proceed with Work until Architect provides further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Maintain adequate temporary support necessary to assure structural integrity of affected work. B. Protect other portions of project work against damage and discoloration. C. Protect Work exposed by cutting against damage and discoloration. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Provide proper surfaces for patching and finishing. B. Employ qualified installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant surfaces 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces C. Cut concrete and other rigid materials with masonry saw or core drill. Do not overcut corners. D. Restore cut or removed work with new products to provide work complete in SECTION 01 73 29-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING accordance with Contract documents. Maintain any original fire-resistance rating. E. Fit Work air-tight to pipes. sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other surface penetrations. F. Where patching occurs, refinish entire surface to provide even finish to match adjacent work. 3.4 CUTTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Not permitted, unless shown on drawings or otherwise approved. 3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section. B. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 73 29-2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish, caused by operations. B. At completion of work, remove waste material, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all sight-exposed surfaces; leave project clean and ready for public occupancy and health department inspection. C. The Owner has established that this project shall generate the least amount of waste possible and that processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible shall be employed. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as many of the waste materials as economically feasible shall be reused, salvaged or recycled such that the waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cleaning for a specified product or work specifically specified in the specification's section for that work. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate recycling efforts with any demolition and salvage work. B. Coordinate recycling, salvaging and/or reuse with subcontractors and provide subcontractors with copies of Waste Management Plan. C. Coordinate with local Regulatory Agencies regarding removal and disposal of any hazardous substances identified in the building or in the salvaged building materials. Obtain and pay for necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give notices as required during performance of construction waste management work. 1.4 ON-SITE MATERIAL SORTING AND STORAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The General Contractor shall coordinate with local haulers to recycle/salvage the following (at minimum) materials on this project: 1. Wood: clean dimensional wood, pallet wood, composite wood (plywood, MDF, etc.). 2. Masonry, Concrete and stone rubble. 3. Metals from banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim. Includes steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass and bronze. 4. Gypsum Board (unpainted). 5. Corrugated Cardboard, paper, packaging. 6. Acoustical Ceiling Tile 7. Light Fixtures and Electrical Equipment 8. Plumbing Fixtures 9. Glass, including window glass and beverage containers. 10. Carpet and Pad: Offcuts and remainder greater than 1 sq. ft.: Set aside for reuse or donation. 11. Plastics, including beverage containers. 12. Ceramic, Stone or Quarry Tile: Half tiles and larger: Set aside for reuse or donation; broken tile, cutoffs smaller than 1/2 tile, and excess mortar and grout: Crush for use in mosaic, sub-base, or fill. 13. Rigid Foam. 14. Perlite products: If possible, return to manufacturer for recycling. 15. Paint & Coatings: Set aside extra paint for future color matches or reuse SECTION 01 74 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/8-1-13 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT by Owner. If local option exists, collect all waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility 16. Field Office(s) waste, including office paper, aluminum cans, glass, plastic, and office cardboard. B. The General Contractor shall be required to recycle above wastes and shall provide the subcontractors, through the hauler, with on-site containers to facilitate recycling. A separate container shall be provided for non-recyclable materials. Recycling and waste bins areas are to be kept neat, clean and clearly marked. Protect bins from non-working hours contamination. C. The General Contractor is responsible for informing field personnel and subcontractors about the recycling program and shall continuously monitor the program to verify adherence to the program and proper separation of the waste. The materials to be recycled are to be handled, stored, protected from contamination and transported in a manner that meets requirements set by designated facility for acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the product to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute cleaning to ensure that grounds and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. C. At reasonable intervals during progress of work, clean site and public properties and dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping and recycling areas off Owner's property. E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as needed basis until building is ready for occupancy. F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. H. Remove all visible manufacturer's labels, nameplates, or other identifying devices. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ professional cleaning service for final cleaning of all areas prior to Owner's final inspection. B. In preparation for substantial completion or public occupancy and health department inspection, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces. C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, and protective coverings from equipment and materials, from sight exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish SECTION 01 74 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT surfaces so designed to shine on actual finish. D. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. E. Pressure clean all concrete and asphalt surfaces; rake clean other surfaces on grounds. F. Replace air conditioning filters at construction completion. G. Clean ducts, blowers and coils, if air conditioning units were operated without filters during construction. H. Maintain cleaning until project or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 74 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes the following contract closeout items: 1. Description of Requirements 2. Closeout Procedures 3. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion 4. Prerequisites to Final Acceptance 1.2 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Division 1 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 D. Cleaning and Waste Management Section 01 74 00 E. Operation and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 23 F. Warranties Section 01 78 36 G. Project Record Documents Section 01 78 39 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: Project Closeout is term used to describe certain collective project requirements, indicating completion of Work, that shall be fulfilled near end of Contract time in preparation for Final Acceptance and occupancy of Work by Owner, as well as final payment to Contractor and normal termination of Contract. B. Time of Contract Closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", therefore, time of closeout may be either single time period for entire Work or series of time periods for individual elements of Work that have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. This time variation, if any, shall be applicable to other provisions of this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Architect will perform one Substantial Completion review and one Final Closeout review for each designated Phase of construction. Cost of additional Substantial Completion reviews and Final Closeout reviews required due to incomplete elements of Work shall be paid by Contractor, as follows: 1. Owner will deduct Architect's compensation amount from Contractor's final payment as follows: a. Principle's time at 130.00 per hour. b. Architect's time at $100.00 per hour. c. Clerical and staff at three [3] times the hourly rate. d. Charges will be made for necessary travel time, auto expense computed at $0.56 per mile, and all other expenses incurred in SECTION 01 77 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT making inspections. 1.6 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual Specifications Sections. B. Deliver, as specific work is completed, to Project Site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to substantial Completion. C. Provide spare construction materials in similar fashion as indicated in appropriate Sections of Specifications. 1.7 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: Complete following before requesting Architect's inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, either for entire Work or for portions of Work. List known exceptions in request. 1. In progress payment request that coincides with, or is first request following date Substantial Completion is claimed, show either 100% completion for portion of Work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, value of incomplete Work, and reason for Work being incomplete. 2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship / maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. a. Include for Owner's review & acceptance procedures for Contractor's response to warranty items following final acceptance, including designated contact person & time limit for Contractor response. 4. Submit air balancing reports to Architect and Owner's Representative. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock of material and similar physical items to Owner. 6. Complete instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from Project Site, along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups and, similar elements. 7. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touch-up painting of blemished surfaces. 8. Test fire and life safety systems in presence of Owner's Representative, Architect and permit jurisdiction officials. 9. Obtain Governing Jurisdiction Certifications of Occupancy. 10. Complete major punchlist items. 11. Contractor shall submit copy of Contractor's Punchlist to Architect and Owner, clearly stating that building is ready for review with exception of items noted in Contractor's Punchlist. B. Review procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's request for review, Architect will either proceed with review or advise Contractor of unfulfilled prerequisites. C. Following initial review, Architect will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion or will advise Contractor of Work which must be performed before Certificate will be issued. Architect will repeat review when requested and when assured that Work has been substantially completed. Contractor shall pay costs of repeat reviews. See paragraph 1.5, C. SECTION 01 77 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D. Results of completed review will form initial "punchlist" for final acceptance. 1.8 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. General: Complete following before requesting Architect's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment as required by General Conditions. List known exceptions, if any, in request. C. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punchlist of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and has been reviewed and dated by Architect. D. Submit consent of surety. E. Obtain Owner's acceptance of submitted procedures for Contractor's response to warranty items following final acceptance. F. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. G. Re-review procedure: Architect will re-review Work upon receipt of Contractor's notice that Work has not been completed, including punchlist items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances that are acceptable to Architect. H. Upon completion of re-review, Architect will either prepare Certificate of Final Acceptance, or will advise Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled, but are required for Final Acceptance. If necessary, re-review procedure will be repeated. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 77 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. 1. Prepare operation and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referred to in other sections of the specification. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Contract Closeout Section 01 77 00 B. Project Record Documents Section 01 78 39 C. Testing and Balancing Division 22, 23 & 26 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 3. Competent to prepare required drawings. 1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 '/2 inches by 11 inches. 2. Type: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text paper. 4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product or piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions", including: a. Title of Project. b. Subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic cover. 2. Maximum ring size: 3", 'D' ring. 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 1.5 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. SECTION 01 78 23 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagram. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Contract Documents to assure correct and complete installation. a. Do not use shop drawings as maintenance drawings. D. Written test, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation. 1. Organize in consistent format under separate heading for different procedure. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Proper procedures in event of failure. 2. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.6 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two copies of complete manual in final form. B. For architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. For moisture-protection and weather exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information of products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. SECTION 01 78 23 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA D. Additional requirements for maintenance data as specified in respective sections of the Specification. 1.7 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit three (3) copies of complete manual in final form. B. For each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "Trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule. a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 8. Contractor's coordination drawings. 9. As installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specification. C. For each electrical and electronic system as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel board. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. SECTION 01 78 23 -3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA b. Guide to "Trouble shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specification. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data become apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as specified in respective sections of the specification. 1.8 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to start of work. B. Submit one (1) copy of completed data in final form fifteen days prior to final inspection or acceptance. 1. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance with comments. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form ten (10) days after final inspection or acceptance. 1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 78 23 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 36 BUILDER'S WARRANTY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Compile specified warranties. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Owner for review. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Warranties. 1. Prepare in duplicate packets. 2. Format: a. Size 8 1/2 inches by 11 inches, punch sheet for standard three-ring binder. b. Identify each packet with types or printed title "Warranties", including: a) Title of Project. b) Name of Contractor. c) Date of duration of warranty. B. Service and maintenance contracts executed by the respective manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor. 1. Provide two (2) original signed copies for each contract. 2. Provide the following information for each copy: a. Table of contents, typed in orderly sequence. b. Product or work item. c. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. d. Scope. e. Date of beginning of service and maintenance. f. Duration of service maintenance contract. g. Information for Owner's personnel on proper procedure in case of failure. h. Instances which may affect the validity of the Contract. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. C. Warranty: Submit warranty per attached Warranty Form. D. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.3 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance. B. Otherwise make submittals within ten days after Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 01 78 36-1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 36 BUILDER'S WARRANTY NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 78 36-2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 36 BUILDER'S WARRANTY WARRANTY FORM Building Components and/or Sub-trade Written guarantee shall be in the following form, on the subcontractor's, manufacturer's or material supplier's own letterhead: Owner(s): Roy Rogers, Tigard, Oregon For good and valuable consideration, the undersign Warrantor hereby warrants to the Owner(s) identified above and to the successors or transferees, all of whom are hereby referred to as Owners that: Warranty for: Which we have provided in The Adrienne — Tigard, Oregon Has/Have been done in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and Specification and that the work as installed will fulfill the requirements included in the Specification. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within a period of year(s) from date of certification of Substantial Completion, or as may be considered per terms of the General Conditions of the Contract, of the above-mentioned Project; ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect exempted. In the event of our failure to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within a reasonable period of time, as determined by and after being notified in writing by the Owner, we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. This warranty shall be in addition to, and in no way reduce, all other rights and privileges which such Owners may have under any other law or instrument, and shall be binding on the Warrantor notwithstanding any provision to the contrary contained in the contract of purchase or any other instrument executed by the Owners. Signed (Material Supplies or General Contractor) Countersigned (Contractor if for Material Supplier) Local Representative to contract for services: Name Address Phone Number END OF WARRANTY FORM SECTION 01 78 36-3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 36 BUILDER'S WARRANTY WARRANTY FORM General Contractor Written guarantee shall be in the following form, on the Contractor's own letterhead: Owner(s): Roy Rogers, Tigard, Oregon For good and valuable consideration, the undersign Warrantor hereby warrants to the Owner(s) identified above and to the successors or transferees, all of whom are hereby referred to as Owners that: Warranty for: GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S BUILDING WARRANTY For Project: The Adrienne —Tigard, Oregon The Building, including appurtenances located on the property identified above, is constructed or improved in substantial conformity with the General Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and Specification and that the work as installed will fulfill the requirements included in the Specification. We agree to repair or replace any or all of the work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within a period of year(s) from date of certification of Substantial Completion, or as may be considered per terms of the General Conditions of the Contract, of the above-mentioned Project; ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect exempted. In the event of our failure to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within a reasonable period of time, as determined by and after being notified in writing by the Owner, we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. This warranty shall be in addition to, and in no way reduce, all other rights and privileges which such Owners may have under any other law or instrument, and shall be binding on the Warrantor notwithstanding any provision to the contrary contained in the contract of purchase or any other instrument executed by the Owners. Signed (General Contractor) Title Local Representative to contract for services: Name Address Phone Number END OF WARRANTY FORM SECTION 01 78 36-4 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain at the site one record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Architects bulletins or written instructions. 6. Approved shop drawings, product data and samples. 7. Field test records. 8. Applicable reference standards and codes specified in individual sections of the specification. 9. Construction completion schedule. 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office, apart from documents used for his construction. B. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. C. Provide storage space for samples. D. File documents in accordance with CSI's Master format. E. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. F. Make documents and samples available for inspection upon request by Owners. 1.3 MARKING DEVICE A. Mark record information with colored pencil or pen on bond. 1.4 RECORDING A. Label each document: "Project Record" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish floor data. 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Architect's Bulletins or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original Contract drawings. D. Specification's Changes and Addenda: Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier or each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Architect's Bulletins or by Change Order. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. Project Record documents shall be submitted as follows: 1. One (1) hard copy of all marked up plans. 2. All marked up plans shall be scanned to a PDF format and saved to CD SECTION 01 78 39-1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS or DVD. Submit (1) copy of CD or DVD. B. At completion of project, deliver records to the Owner's project manager. C. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, certifying that each document as submitted is an up-to-date record of the "As-built" condition of the work, complete and accurate. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 78 39-2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 30 00 Soils Investigation 02 41 19 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 30 00 SOILS INVESTIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Geotechnical Investigations (Sub-Surface Soils Testing) for the Project site have been performed and reports of those investigations have been completed as follows: 1. Preliminary Geotechnical Engineering Report, Proposed 4-Story Building, 7148 SW Gonzaga Street, Tigard, Oregon; Prepared by Terradolce Consultants, Inc., Project No. 528-001, dated January 28, 2013. 1.2 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. The Owner and/or Architect assume no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the contractor related to information included in the Report. Should the Contractor require additional information concerning subsurface conditions, he may, without cost to the Owner, make additional investigations. Should additional investigations produce information different from that in Soils Report, notify Owner in writing. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soils Report, including but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub-bases and fill and construction of building foundations and parking surfaces. Provide building foundations and parking surfaces in compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be found between the requirements of Soils Report and the Drawings and/or Specifications, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 02 30 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED 4-STORY BUILDING 7148 SW GONZAGA STREET TIGARD, OREGON Prepared for: Steve Leasure Centrex Construction 8250 SW Hunziker Street Tigard, Oregon 97223 January 28, 2013 Project No. 528-001 TERRA DOLCE CONSULTANTS, INC. TERRA DOLCE CONSULTANTS,INC. 4706 NE 75"AVE PORTLAND, OREGON 97218 503-502-5114 January 28, 2013 Project No. 528-001 Steve Leasure Centrex Construction 8250 SW Hunziker Street Tigard, Oregon 97223 PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED 4-STORY BUILDING 7148 SW GONZAGA STREET TIGARD, OREGON Dear Steve: Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. (TDC) is pleased to present our report summarizing our evaluation of the referenced property. The purpose of our work was to conduct a site investigation and provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed building. Our work was completed under the terms of our January 15, 2013 proposal. SITE DESCRIPTION The site is located on the eastside of SW 72nd Avenue, just north of Highway 217 in Tigard, Oregon (see Figure 1). Presently, the 0.47-acre site is undeveloped except for a small shed that is located in the western portion of the site. The site is covered in grass and has one or two trees in the southeast corner. Based on our fieldwork, the site is mantled with 3 to 4 feet of undocumented Fill. PROJECT UNDERSTANDING TDC understands that the site will be developed with a 4-story building in the eastern half of the site and a paved parking lot in the western portion. At the time of our investigations, the layout for the proposed building footprint and parking was not available. It is our understanding, however, that the anticipated loads will most likely be 4 kips per lineal foot for the wall loads and 50 to 70 kips for the column loads. GEOLOGIC SETTING Review of the geologic maps of the area indicates that the site is underlain with the Fine-grained Facies of the Catastrophic Flood Deposits (www.portlandmaps.com). The fine-grained deposits typically consist of coarse sand to silt-size material. The finer sediments are predominantly quartz and feldspar and also contain white mica. The coarser sediments are predominantly Columbia River basalt fragments. Poorly defined beds 1 to 3 feet thick are observed in outcrop. Locally, beds are separated by accumulations of brown clay and iron oxide 2 inches thick, which are probably paleosols. Soil development commonly introduces significant clay into the upper 2-3 5-10 feet of the deposits. The fine sediments are typically mantle slopes up to elevation 400 feet. FIELD INVESTIGATIONS On January 18, 2013, TDC conducted a site investigation to evaluate the surface and subsurface conditions of the site. The following observations were made: Surface Conditions. On the day of our site investigation, a portion of the proposed parking lot had been overexcavated and replaced with 2-inch crushed rock (see Figure 2). The overexcavated material was stockpiled on the site and covered with Visqueen (see Figure 2). The remainder of the site was covered with grass. There were one or two trees in the eastern portion of the site. The location of the trees might be within the footprint of the proposed building. Subsurface Conditions Subsurface conditions of the site were evaluated by drilling two borings, (designated B-1 and B-2, see Figure 2) to 22.5 feet below ground surface (bgs) and 20 feet bgs, respectively. Soil samples were collected at 2.5-foot-intervals to 10 feet bgs and 5-foot-intervals to the extent of the borings using the Standard Penetration Test (ASTM 1587). For each test, an 18-inch-long split-spoon sampler was driven with a 140-pound hammer. The number of blows required to drive the sampler 18 inches are recorded in 6-inch intervals. The last two blow counts are added together to determine the blows per foot (bpf). The blows per foot are used to determine the in-place consistency of the soil. The following subsurface conditions were encountered at the site: Undocumented Fill. Three (3) to four (4) feet of undocumented fill was encountered throughout the site. The fill consisted of soft, moist Silt with trace organics. The fill is not suitable as a subgrade for building or the proposed parking lot. The material should be overexcavated and replaced with compacted structural fill in an area 5 feet outside of the proposed building footprint and the parking area. The undocumented fill is appropriate only for the landscaped areas. Fine-grained Flood Deposits. The Fine-grained Flood Deposits were encountered below the Undocumented Fill to 19 feet bgs in B-1 and in B-2. The Fine-grained deposit was fine-grained Silt to Sandy Silt, brown, medium stiff, with trace micas and slightly cemented. Measured blow count in the Silty Sand ranged from 8 to 11 bpf. Columbia River Basalt. Columbia River Basalt was encountered at 20 feet bgs in both borings. In B-1, the basalt had a 2-foot-thick weathered layer that we were able to drill through. Directly below that, however, we encountered refusal. Groundwater. Groundwater was encountered at 9 feet bgs in the borings. Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 2 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS The conclusions and recommendations presented in this report are based on the information provided by Centrex Construction, results of the field investigation, and professional judgment. We have observed only a small portion of the pertinent soil and groundwater conditions. The recommendations presented in this report are preliminary and are based on the assumption that the soil and groundwater conditions do not deviate appreciably from the conditions encountered during our field investigation. Once the design of the building is completed, we'll finalize our recommendations and submit a Final Geotechnical Engineering Report. If during construction of the building undesirable conditions are encountered, then we should be consulted for further recommendations. General Field data indicate that the site is mantled with 3 to 4 feet of Undocumented Fill overlying 16 feet of medium stiff Silt on top of dense basalt. In our opinion, the site is geotechnically suitable for the proposed development. This conclusion is based on the assumptions that the recommendations presented in this report are followed, and that during construction site conditions change from what is presented in this report, that we will be consulted for updated recommendations for developing the site. Site Preparation and Earthwork The site should be stripped of the grass and other vegetation within 5 feet of the building and parking lot footprint. The stripped material should be removed from the site or stockpiled for use as cover in the landscaped area. This material is not suitable for Structural Fill within 5 feet of the building footprint or parking area. If the onsite trees need to be removed, then the rootballs should be overexcavated and replaced with Structural Fill. The Undocumented Fill is not suitable within 5 feet of the building or parking lot subgrade. This material shall be overexcavated to firm-native soils and removed from the site. If soft spot or wet areas are encountered below the Undocumented Fill, then those areas should be overexcavated and replaced with Structural Fill. Due to the fine-grained nature of the silts, care should be taken that the subgrade is not disturbed or rutted during site preparation. Wet Weather or Wet Soil Construction During wet weather or soil conditions, the exposed soils may be disturbed by construction traffic. Such disturbance will structurally weaken the soil and render it unsuitable for uses in foundation bearing, for subgrade of compacted structural fills, and for subgrades of asphalt. If construction occurs during wet weather, construction traffic should be rounded to avoid areas of exposed fine-grained soils and should be protected by at least 18 inches of 3-inch-minus crushed rock underlain with woven geotextile, such as LINQ GTF 300 or equivalent. In addition, care should be taken to minimize disturbance of native silty soil, which may become "pumped" and weakened by repeated loading and vibratory compaction and wheeled equipment. Should soils become disturbed, Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 3 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 the soils should be removed to firm native subgrade and replaced with compacted structural fill placed in accordance with the recommendations below. Structural Fill TDC recommends that structural fill shall consist of 1 %2 to 3/4-inch crushed rock containing less than 10 percent fines. The imported fill shall be placed in 8- to 12- inch-thick lifts and compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by a Modified Proctor (ASTM D1557). The material should be within 3 percent of the optimum water content. Preliminary Shallow Footings Recommendations TDC recommends an allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) for dead loads. The allowable bearing pressure may be increased by one-third for transitory live loads, such as loads and seismic loading. TDC recommends that continuous footings and individual spread footings should have a minimum width of 24 inches and a minimum embedment of 18 inches. Subgrades for the shallow foundations should be firm and free of organics and deleterious debris as determined by the geotechnical engineer. Soft soils or undocumented fills encountered during excavation of the footings should be removed to firm soils and backfilled with imported granular structural fill, as described above. Lateral loads on the building foundations may be resisted using an allowable frictional coefficient of 0.35. In addition, passive resistance may be considered using an allowable equivalent fluid weight of 300 pound per cubic foot (pcf). For consideration of passive resistance, the upper 1 foot of embedment should be disregarded. Estimated Total and Differential Settlements Total and differential settlements were calculated for the spread footings using an estimated structural load, allowable bearing pressures, and laboratory data. For the spread footing foundations, designed in accordance with the above recommendations, the estimated total static settlement will be less than 1 inch, with a differential settlement less than '/2 inch. Slab-on-Grade Recommendations The slab-on-grade floor should be designed for an allowable subgrade reaction modulus of approximately 150 pounds per cubic inch. The subgrade soils must be in a firm, non-yielding conditional at the time of slab construction. Soft areas encountered during the preparation of the slab subgrade should be overexcavated and replaced with structural fill. A capillary break consisting of at least 6 inches of clean gravel should be placed underneath the floor slab. The gravel should consist of 'A-inch to 3/4-inch rock with no more than 2 percent passing the No. 200 sieve (washed analyses). Suitable material is PCC course aggregated specified in Section 02690.20 of the Oregon Department of Transportation "Standard Specification Highway Construction". Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 4 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 For wet weather conditions, care must be taken to reduce the potential of rainwater ponding on the slab-on-grade rock section. If the slab is to be covered with a moisture-sensitive flooring, and wet-weather conditions are anticipated, consideration should be given to use of a water retarding admixture added to the concrete or sealing of the finished slab. In addition, a 4-inch thick life of 1/4-inch to 3/4-inch, open graded, angular drain rock placed below the capillary break, discussed above, may be substituted for vapor barrier if approve by the geotechnical engineer or project architect and used in conjunction with an approved water proofing admixture. It is our experience that concrete slab-on-grade commonly exhibit shrinkage cracks despite the presence of steel reinforcing or fiber strands. This cracking can be reduced by using a low-slump concrete, properly designed and constructed joints and by properly curing the concrete. Flexible Pavement Design As noted above, up to 4 feet of Undocumented Fill was encountered across the site. TDC recommends that the Undocumented Fill be overexcavated to firm, non- yielding Silty material and removed from the site. Once the subgrade is exposed, then a woven geotextile, such as LINQ-GTF 300 or equivalent should be placed on the subgrade. The area should be brought to subgrade level and 8 inches of 3/4-inch crushed rock should be place. The parking lot should be paved with a minimum of 3 inches of PG-64-22, Level 2 - 1/4" Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) Dense Graded. As stated above, pavement sections assume that the subgrade is unyielding. The pavement subgrades should be proof-rolled, under the observation of the geotechnical engineer, with a heavy roller or a loaded 10-cubic-yard dump truck before placement of crushed rock base material. Utility Excavation and Backfill It is anticipated that the excavation for utilities may be up to 4 feet deep. If utility trenches deeper, then proper shoring should be incorporated into the construction plans. Excavation for utilities may generate soils that are impacted with hydrocarbons. Only imported granular fills should be used as utility trench backfill. Imported granular backfill should consist of sand, sand and gravel, or crushed rock up to 1 %2- inch in dimension and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve (washed analyses). The bedding material used for the pipes should conform to the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of pipe selected. The granular backfill should be placed in maximum 12-inch loose lifts and compacted to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by Modified Proctor (ASTM D-1557) using a vibratory plate compactors attached to backhoes ("hoepacts"). The stability of the excavation and the design, installation, and dewatering of shoring for the excavation is the responsibility of the contractor. Workers should not be allowed to enter excavation of 4 feet or deeper unless the excavations have been Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 5 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 properly shored and dewatered. All excavation and shoring systems should be in compliance with current local, state, and federal worker safety codes and practices. 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code Seismic Design Recommendations Table 1 Seismic Design Recommendations Seismic Variables Recommended Values Site Classification: D1 Latitude/Longitude 45.42828/-122.75073 Maximum Considered Spectral Accelerations: Short Period: Ss = 0.949g Residential Design Information: Residential Site Value: 2/3 x Fa x Ss 2/3 (0.981) (1.121) = 0.709g PGA= 0.709/2.5 0.28 kh= 0.14 Document Review and Construction Monitoring TDC should be retained to review final plans and specifications. This review will allow us to examine the documents to determine whether the intent of our recommendations presented in this report was incorporated into the design of the building. TDC should be retained to provide construction monitoring and testing services during the earthwork and foundation construction activities. The purpose of our field monitoring services is to confirm that the site conditions are as anticipated and to provide field recommendations as required based on the conditions encountered. TDC should provide Special Inspections for the following project construction activities: • Site stripping; • Foundation and parking lot subgrade preparation; and • Slab-on-grade subgrade. A Materials Testing Company, (i.e., ACS Testing) should be contracted directly with the owners to provide field and laboratory compaction tests for the Structural Fill, asphalt base rock, and asphalt testing. Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 6 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 IMITATIONS Geotechnical review is of paramount importance in engineering practice. The poor performance of many foundations has been attributed to inadequate construction review. On-site grading and earthwork should be observed and, where necessary, tested by a qualified engineering firm to verify the compliance with the recommendations contained in this report. Foundation excavation should also be observed to compare the generalized site conditions assumed in this report with those found on the site at the time of construction. If the plans for site development are changed, or if various or undesirable geotechnical conditions are encountered during construction, the geotechnical engineer should be consulted for further recommendations. This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the Client to ensure that the recommendations are incorporated in the plans and the necessary steps are taken to see that the contractor and subcontractors carry out such recommendations in the field. Geotechnical engineering is characterized by a certain degree of uncertainty. Professional judgments presented are based partly on our understanding of the proposed construction and partly on our general experience. Our engineering work and judgments rendered meet current professional standards; no other warranties, either expressed or implied are made. This report is subject to review and should not be relied upon after a period of 3 years. Sincerely, Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. �_tp PROFe, 17857PE OR4at C 4/1. 04ett4)'25,VC1/11r EXPIRE& " 3o- 3 Cynthia L. Hovind, P.E., G.E. Professional Geotechnical Engineer, OR-17857PE Attachments Figure 1 -Vicinity Map Figure 2 - Site Plan Boring Log Centrex Construction January 28,2012 Page 7 Geotechnical Evaluation 7148 SW Gonzaga St Tigard,Oregon Project No.528-001 -1- s ; p SW Ptorrfe St SW Pta'M St Far t& r,, Southwe S� Q ! 1� j SW Homes St � cn tl 1. SW eaytor St s ea 0 SW Wither Ln # °d � 3 C ` SW Canto+St n ° i_ v 2 "Pc, 14 a SW Krume Tthd2e Dr SW Oahr'OUth 54 ,,:,tilt`t aka lb, ao Parrs SwO' a...04 ( v Bay ra ant 0 ,Yi Hermosa wsy 2 m a� 3 : P Ltberty i I a4, City Putt t3 S SW Southwood or r' George Fox ,,, in 'bpi University Portland Sk,� Center Near Tigard t in 3 a * $ !1 � Suntxoor<C� Ro SAN Hi n-4,..:...,; b a o *� IT 2 S E ;�± SW P.meia St i Portland Oregon 7r, a They Chtur' t SW Varna S' rM o!Joacis Cheri!or P. 0 ii L ottta day Saints 4"A'I1 m 4 SW Cherry Dr a sw4 ,� Ti° ? Sl St SW loch Centar Dr b KrWar r„ X013 Google N Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. Proposed New Building 4706 NE 75th Ave 7148 SW Gonzaga St Portland, Oregon 97218 Phone 503.502.5114 Tigard, Oregon Project No. 528-001 1 January 28, 2013 I Vicinity Map I Figure 1 x 1 GRAVELED AREA SW Gonzaga St COVERED EXCAVATED At—1 i ,.. 44 . . , -, , 'ay k _ - N Gonzagia St Mgar• i i,i i c ..4 B-2 r i I I _ I I t a AB le + 41 A I T i A . Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. Proposed New Building 4706 NE 75th Ave 7148 SW Gonzaga St Portland, Oregon 97218 Phone 503.502.5114 Tigard, Oregon Project No. 528-001 I January 28, 2013 I Site Map I igurc 2 BORING LOGS Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. Boring Log No. B-1 7148 SW Gonzaga St Location:7148 SW Gonzaga St WO#:528-001 ,ethod:Solid Stem Ground EL: Hammer:Safety Hammer Hammer weight(lb): 140 Hole depth(ft):22.5 Sampler:SS Drop(in):30 G.W.T.@ Drilling(ft): 10 Sampled by:CLH Driller:Dan Fischer Excavating,Inc. Drill Date:January 18,2013 Logged by:CLH m 1— y CO • SPT.blow/ft oz° in li ? Soil Description Moisture% Notes 0 20 40 60 0 Fill(ML)Brown,moist,medium Stiff,medium • 0 1 1-2-3 plasticity,with organics(Silty Fill) c c • $ 2 2-3-4 ML Silt to Sandy Silt(ML)Gray mottled brown,moist, d 5 • medium stiff to stiff,trace micas,trace fine-grained • 5 to 3 3-4-5 sand(Fine-grained Flood Deposits) 0 • 4 2-3-5 � I c 10 ♦ 10 °-° 5 3-5-4 8 0 0 15 15 •6 1-5-6 a` LL 20 ti...ti Slightly Weathered Basalt,Gray,soft(R2), • 20 8-26-26 8 ti"'v (Columbia River Basalt) ti...y Fresh Basalt,Gray,Hard(R4),(Columbia River ■ 8 50/1" Basalt) Boring completed at depth of 22.5 vai 25 25 m A 0 N L u m 30 30 S 35 35 Remarks: Refusal at 22.5 feet. Plate 1 Terra Dolce Consultants, Inc. Boring Log No. B-2 7148 SW Gonzaga St Location:7148 SW Gonzaga St WO#:528-001 Method:Solid Stem Ground EL: Hammer:Safety Hammer Hammer weight(lb): 140 Hole depth(ft):20 Sampler:SS Drop(in):30 G.W.T.@ Drilling(ft): 11 Sampled by:CLH Driller: Dan Fischer Excavating,Inc. Drill Date:January 18,2013 Logged by:CLH r �, ■ SPT.blow/ft z a o �, N Soil Description Moisture% Notes 0 o in 0 m a 0 20 40 60 •Fill(ML)Brown,moist,medium Stiff,medium ■ 0 1 1-5-6 plasticity,with organics(Silty Fill) 0 c • 2 1-2-3 ML Silt to Sandy Silt(ML)Gray mottled brown,moist, 5 medium stiff to stiff,trace micas,trace fine-grained • 5 H 3 2-4-6 sand(Fine-grained Flood Deposits) 7i • 4 3-3-4 a o 10 SM Silty Sand(SM)Brown,loose to medium dense • 10 y 7 5 3-5-5 (Fine-grained Flood Deposits) N O • • C7 15 al 15 6 4-4-5 U H U LL 20 Fresh Basalt,Gray,hard(R4)(Columbia River • 20 7 6-31-50/4" Basalt) Boring completed at depth of 22.5 :g 25 25-- 7 A 0 N t u d ti c 30 30 -- J a __ 35 Remarks: Refusal at 22.5 feet. Plate 2 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Selective demolition of portions of the existing Construction; debris removal and disposal; substrate cleaning, tenant space security and public safety as affected by demolition work and; dust, noise, odor, and moisture control during the demolition process. B. Secure and pay for all public sub-trade permits and permits required to perform work under this Contract. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Conditions Division 0 B. Cleaning and Waste Management Division 1 C. Demolition Notes See Drawings 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable local codes and ordinances concerning demolition operations, recycling, and refuse removal. 1. If more restrictive than the aforementioned local codes, comply with ANSI A10.6 "Safety Requirements for Demolition". 1.4 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Meet at the site with Owner and / or Architect's Representatives. B. Review location of existing service and utility lines. C. Review protection of existing adjacent surfaces to remain. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall employ adequate number of skilled tradesmen, experienced in the various building subsystems to properly disassemble, mark and store system components scheduled to be salvaged without damage. 1.6 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not cut, drill, or otherwise damage structural framing members without approval of architect. B. Shoring and or temporary bracing is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.7 SALVAGE A. Items noted on drawings to be "salvaged" or required for re-use in finished project, shall be carefully removed from in-place condition, taking care not to damage item and associated fasteners, placed in suitable temporary storage container, labeled as to content, and stored on site in an appropriate location as to avoid damage from continuing demolition work. These items shall remain on the property of the Owner. B. All surplus material not scheduled for salvage or reuse shall become property of the Contractor. 1.8 TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide alternate routes around closed and obstructed areas when required by Owner's Representative. 1.9 DISTURBANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 02 41 19 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Work under this contract shall be performed to limit disturbance from noise, dust, or interruption of utility services to times and levels approved in advance by the Owner. 1. Coordinate any shut down of building utilities, communication and/or alarm systems required by this project with the Owner a minimum of 48 hours in advance of desired interruption. 2. Coordinate demolition related to voice and data systems with Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Protection During Demolition: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces, equipment, and facilities to remain, from damage during selective demolition and material removal. 2. Install bracing and shoring prior to sawing structural components. 3. Protect persons passing through and around demolition areas. 4. Comply with IBC Section 3306 for pedestrian protection. 3.2 CORING AND SAWING: A. Saw concrete surfaces as indicated and required to receive new Work. B. Cut reinforcing bars in existing concrete during sawing operation until flush and without damage to the bond between concrete and reinforcing bars. C. Cut Work by methods least likely to damage existing exposed surfaces scheduled to remain. D. Prior to concrete coring or sawing, locate all subsurface utilities.All damaged utilities during coring and sawing shall be repaired per 3.4 below. 3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING BUILDING BY CONTRACTOR: A. Remove portions of existing construction and site improvements as indicated on Drawings and as required to receive new Work. 1. The limits of demolition shown on the Drawings are for general guidance only. The Contractor shall ascertain the full extent of demolition required to accommodate the new Work and produce a consistent and seamless appearance. B. Utility lines and fixtures not scheduled for re-use shall be completely removed or, when approved by Architect, shall be capped behind line of new finishes per Building Code. C. When demolition of applied finishes is specified (carpet, sheathing, wall coverings, tile, etc.)the demolition will remove the finish and its bonding agent leaving a clean substrate. 1. Removal of adhesives shall be by mechanical means. Solvents and high VOC cleaners will not be used. D. Provide adequate dust control throughout duration of demolition Work. 3.4 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT: SECTION 024119 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Repair damage to existing surfaces, materials, equipment, site improvements, utility lines, and adjacent property not scheduled for demolition to meet conditions existing prior to demolition operations. B. Employ skilled personnel and subcontractors selected for new Work to repair damaged surfaces, materials, equipment, and utility lines. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Do not sell or burn demolished materials on site. B. Transport debris to an approved and licensed land fill area or recycling center. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. See Section 01 74 00. 3.7 CLEANING OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AREAS: A. Broom clean interior surfaces daily during demolition Work. B. At completion of demolition leave site in vacuumed clean condition, replace all temporary HVAC and general dust filter systems with new/clean filters. C. Remove all temporary barricades. END OF SECTION SECTION 02 41 19 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 35 19 Concrete Slab Grinding, Coloring and Polishing 03 54 13 Gypsum Cement Underlayment SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes all formwork for pouring of structural cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete Reinforcement Section 03 20 00 B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 C. Concrete Finishing Section 03 35 00 D. Structural Notes See Drawings 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Concrete formwork to meet the requirements of ACI 347, latest edition, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." C. Meet requirements of ANSI A 10.9, latest edition, "Safety Requirements for Concrete Construction and Masonry Work." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of all embedded accessories that are installed in this Section of work but furnished in other Sections. B. Notify respective trades and give opportunity to place embedded items before concrete is poured. Items provided by other trades for installation shall be properly set as indicated. C. Locate sleeves, pipes and conduits to avoid impairing strength of construction per A.C.I. 318. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Form board: At all surfaces use new plywood formboard coated with a non-corrosive chemical releasing agent which will not penetrate or stain the concrete surface or attract dirt or deleterious matter. Apply in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed directions. 1. Permanently concealed surfaces: APA, Plyform with `B' grade face. 2. Permanently exposed surfaces: APA, Plyform grade MDO (Medium Density Overlay) or APA Plyform with 'B' grade face (new material only). 3. Permanently exposed architectural surfaces: APA, Plyform grade HDO (High Density Overlay). Locations as indicated on Drawings. B. Use flexible spring steel or laminated boards to form true radius bends as required. C. Formwork accessories: Dayton Superior, Meadow Burke, Watson Bowman or equal. 1. Fixed metal washer snap ties, with 1" break back and fixed washer large enough to cover drilled holes in forms. 2. 3/4" PVC preformed chamfer former strips. 3. Preformed Control Joints: Dayton Superior "Screed Key Joint," or equal. 4. Contraction Joints: Dayton Superior"Screed Key Joint," or equal. 031000 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Forms for concrete permanently exposed to view are to produce a surface at least as smooth and free of surface irregularities as produced by face veneer of new, HDO "Plyform" grade per APA product standard, latest edition. B. Forms for concrete concealed from view may have a surface with irregularities, honeycombing, bulges, depressions, not exceeding 3/16" in 12". C. Set and maintain screeds to insure completed top surface of floor slabs with no deviations from design surface in excess of levelness and flatness tolerance requirements specified. 3.2 GRADES, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES A. Verify all grades, lines, levels, dimensions and conditions including openings as shown on Architectural, Structural, Civil, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Report errors and/or inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work. B. Slope all slabs requiring drainage approximately 1/4" per ft. unless specifically otherwise shown. C. A local levelness and flatness tolerance: 1. ACI F-Number equivalent: FF 50 / FL 30 (for slabs on grade) 2. ACI F-Number equivalent: FF 30 (for elevated slabs) 3. Overall general conformity from design grade of + or - 3/4" of final elevations shown on Drawings for slabs-on-grade. 3.3 ERECTION A. Construct and set all forms accurately to detail, line levels and size, adequately brace to make strong and unyielding. Make tight to prevent escape of mortar and avoid formation of fins. B. Form design, engineering, strength, construction and safety are the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Use fixed metal washer snap ties, with 1" break back and fixed washer large enough to cover drilled holes in forms. D. Reuse of badly patched or damaged form panels will not be permitted. E. Provide special forms, inserts, moldings, plaster molds, etc., as required to produce architectural feature indicated. F. Place corner fillets at all exposed concrete corners. G. Use no corner fillets where they will interfere with architectural details or where walls and partitions are built flush. H. Carefully locate and form all pits and leave all chases, openings and holes as required by mechanical and special equipment in concrete. Where shown and/or required, depress floor slabs. At areas of depression of slabs, provide minimum thickness or depth as noted for adjacent areas unless otherwise shown. J. Bevel or groove all wood nailing blocks to prevent loosening. All wood blocks to be pressure treated fir. K. Cast-In items: Provide embedded anchors, inserts, steel shapes, and lifting devices as shown on Shop Drawings and required for final application. 1. See Drawings for cast-in-place lettering. 031000 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK L. Apply form release agents to surface of forms only. Do not contact imbedded items. M. Install plastic cone snap ties at exposed concrete in uniform, symmetrical pattern unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.4 REMOVAL A. The sole responsibility of the removal of forms and for any resulting structural damage rests with the Contractor. B. Concrete members shall attain 80 percent of required 28 day strength before forms are removed. C. When removing forms, do not pry against architecturally finished concrete surfaces. Use only wood edges or other methods which will not damage surfaces to be finished. END OF SECTION 031000 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes all reinforcement steel and welded wire fabric used in cast-in-place concrete at locations shown in Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Cast-in-place Concrete Section 03 30 00 D. Structural Notes See Structural Drawings 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Detail and place reinforcing steel per ACI 318 and 315, latest edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings for review for all steel reinforcement per Section 01 33 00. All detailing shall be done in strict accordance with procedures outlined in the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" ACI 315, latest edition. B. Shop Drawings shall show all dimensions necessary for fabrication and placing of reinforcing steel and accessories, without reference to the Project Drawings. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in rejection of Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall include schedules, bar lists, and details specifically indicated in ACI Manual 315. 1.5 INSPECTIONS A. Provide any special inspections per the requirements of Section 01 45 00. B. Notify Inspection Agency when reinforcing is ready for inspection at least 72 hours before placing concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. All reinforcing steel shall be per ASTM A615, Standard Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. All reinforcing steel to be welded, shall be per ASTM A706, Standard Specifications for welded deformed billet-steel bars for concrete construction. C. All reinforcing steel shall have a minimum yield stress of 60,000 P.S.I. unless shown otherwise on Structural (S) drawings. D. All welded wire mesh (Symbol WWM) shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Welded-Steel Fabric, ASTM A185. E. All reinforcing steel shall be unpainted, uncoated, free from rust or loose scale that will destroy or reduce bond. F. Galvanized chairs, spacers and bolsters per ACI 315. Provide plastic dipped items or all plastic items in contact with forms. G. Fiber reinforcing: Fibermesh or approved equal. 2.2 FABRICATION 032000 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING A. All reinforcing steel shall be fabricated in accordance with ACI 315. All hooks and bends shall conform to ACI Standards unless otherwise shown on the drawings. B. Fabrication shall be performed accurately to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. All bars shall be bent cold in a manner that will not injure the material. C. Make bend for stirrups and ties around pins having at least twice the thickness of the bars; for other bars, six times for 1" and smaller bars, eight times for larger bars. Straightening or rebending not allowed to an extent which will injure reinforcement. D. Reinforcement shall not be lapped at points of maximum stress. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered 4' minimum and away from areas of maximum stress. All laps shall be lapped sufficiently to transfer the full stress by bond. Laps shall be 58 bar diameters of larger bar with a minimum lap of 24". Do not carry reinforcement through expansion unless otherwise noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place reinforcement per ACI 318 and 315 and/or as specified herein. B. Firmly secure steel in position in the forms by suitable ties to prevent dislocation during placement of concrete; support steel securely by means of chairs or spacers. Provide in place bar supports per ACI 315. C. Except where otherwise noted, provide a cover of concrete over reinforcing per ACI 318 and as follows: 1. Bottom of footings and earth forms: 3" 2. Face of walls on backfill side or exposed to weather: 2" 3. Interior wall faces and slabs not exposed to weather: 1-1/2" 4. Center of slabs on grade: 1-1/2" minimum from top or bottom surface 5. Foundation walls (not retaining): 1-1/2" maximum from center of wall D. Clear distance between bars in no case shall be less than 1" nor less than 1-1/2 times maximum size of course aggregate. E. Lap welded wire mesh 12" minimum at all splices (at least one mesh spacing plus 2 inches). END OF SECTION 032000 -2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the mixing and placing of normal weight cast-in- place concrete along with any miscellaneous related accessories. B. Curing and Drying of cast-in-place concrete slabs to meet requirements of finish material applications. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Concrete Formwork Section 03 10 00 D. Concrete Reinforcement Section 03 20 00 E. Concrete Finishing Section 03 35 00 F. Concrete Slab Grinding, Coloring and Finishing Section 03 35 19 G. Finish Materials Various Sections 1.3 STANDARDS A. All material and workmanship per "Specification for Structural Concrete" ACI 301, latest edition, ACI 318, latest edition, and prevailing building code. B. Ready mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM Spec. C-94, latest edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the following required tests per the requirements of Section 01 45 00. 1. Not less than four (4) specimens shall be made by a Certified Concrete Inspector for each day's work or 50 cu. yards. Specimen shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM Spec. C-31 and tested in accordance with ASTM Spec. C-39; one test at 7 days and two at 28 days. Hold fourth cylinder in case of low test or irregularities. Break with other two at 28 days if strength within acceptable limits. 2. Slump tests shall be made when concrete is being placed. 3. If concrete test cylinders are unsatisfactory, the concrete in place shall be checked with a "Schmitt" hammer. If found unsatisfactory after testing, replace all unsatisfactory concrete at no expense to Owner. C. Provide any special inspections per the requirements of Section 01 45 00. D. Slab Moisture Testing: Coordinate curing process with slab moisture/humidity requirements imposed by other sections of these specifications related to applied finishes. 1. There shall be NO water allowed to be added to slab concrete mix from any of the following: a. Moisture standing on under slab vapor barrier prior to pour. b. Moist curing process. c. Rain or other water sources subsequent to initial pour. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Freezing Weather: No work shall be done in weather when temperature falls below 40 degrees at any time during the 24 hours, except with Architect's approval. No accelerating or anti-freeze admixtures shall be used. Earth SECTION 03 30 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE subgrade shall not be frozen when concrete is placed thereon. B. Hot weather: Concrete placed during periods of hot weather, low humidity, or high winds, will be protected from the sun and wind. The recommendations of the Portland Cement Association Bureau Bulletin ST-93, "Hot Weather Concreting" and ST-95, "Curing of Concrete" shall be made a part of this Contract. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit mix designs to Architect for review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Water: Shall conform to ASTM C-94. B. Concrete Aggregates: Shall conform to ASTM Spec. C-33 for reinforced concrete work. Shall be well graded and maximum size of 1-1/2". Size reduced to 3/4" when form is less than 4" and for slabs. C. Cements: Portland Cement shall conform to the ASTM Spec. C-150, Type I, Oregon, Ideal, Sun, Permanente, Calaveras. D. Fly Ash: Type C or F per ASTM Spec. C618-08a. E. Air Entraining Agent: Shall conform to ASTM C-260. F. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C-494. G. Preformed Control Joints: Dayton Superior"Screed Key Joint," or equal. H. Integral Waterproofing: Masterbuilders "stearox." Contraction Joints: Dayton Superior"Screed Key Joint," or equal. J. Concrete Bonding Agent: Febond PVA, Weld-Crete approved. Used as per manufacturer's instruction. K. Liquid Curing Compound: Master Builders, Inc., MasterCure 200W. L. Non Shrink Leveling Grout: Meadows Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. M. Use of calcium chloride is not acceptable. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES A. The proportions of aggregate to cement for concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement without permitting the material to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface. All concrete shall conform to ASTM Spec. C-94. Cement contents and ratios indicate a minimum only. Strength required to govern actual batch mixes. B. Mix materials in transit and up to time of discharge, a minimum of 10 minutes. No water shall be added to the concrete mix after the mix leaves the batch plant. Maximum elapsed time between adding water to mix and placing shall be one hour. C. All concrete shall have the following values: 1. See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. 2. The Contractor shall be singularly responsible that such strengths are achieved. PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 03 30 00 -2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.1 PLACING A. Prior to pouring foundations and slabs, schedule Structural Engineer and permit jurisdiction review and/or testing agency inspection where required by this Section and permit jurisdiction. B. Provide 1/8" wide x 3/4 depth, control joints in on-grade slabs at 16'-0" maximum o.c. unless otherwise noted on Drawings and/or as directed by the Architect, and at exterior slabs at 20'-0" o.c. each way maximum. 1. Provide control joints in topping slab where joints in sub-slab exist. Notify architect where sub-slab control joints are discovered for final determination of topping slab location and configuration. C. Provide 1/2" wide x depth of slab isolation joints of asphalt impregnated fiber board, at all intersections of slabs and vertical faces not doweled together such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and as indicated on drawings. D. Do not run reinforcement or other fixed metal items, embedded in or bonded into concrete, continuously through expansion or contraction joints, unless otherwise noted. E. Concrete shall be handled from a ready-mix truck in such a way as to prevent separation of materials. F. Electrical or gasoline driven vibrator shall be used to effectively place concrete. Care must be taken not to over vibrate the concrete so as to cause separation of materials. G. All equipment and forms shall be cleaned. Forms shall be thoroughly wetted or oiled. H. Excess concrete shall be removed from all trenches and foundations. All base material for slabs on grade to be thoroughly wet immediately before concrete is placed during dry weather. J. All curing compound shall be stripped from slabs receiving additional finish materials. 3.2 GROUT LEVELER PLACEMENT A. Install per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 CURING A. Moist Curing: Moist cure all concrete by maintaining concrete continuously wet for a minimum (7) seven days from initial pour by: 1. Continuous water fog spray. 2. Moisture retaining cover of polyethylene film per ASTM C-171 3. Moisture absorptive burlap fabric per AASTHTO M 182 maintained continuously wet. B. Chemical Curing: At exterior slabs, walks and curbs not receiving other coatings or finishes (i.e., hardeners, sealers, waterproofing, damproofing, paint, adhesives, grout, etc.) provide continuous coating of specified curing compound per manufacturers printed instructions. 3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace concrete surfaces which show excessive shrinkage or cracks or which do not drain properly, as directed by the Architect or the Engineer, at Contractor's expense. SECTION 03 30 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE END OF SECTION SECTION 03 30 00 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the finishing and repairing of all cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 C. Concrete Slab Grinding, Coloring and Finishing Section 03 35 19 D. Finish Materials Various Sections 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Products List: Before ordering, submit detailed list of materials proposed for use on work. 1.4 WORKMANSHIP A. All work by experienced and approved cement finishers. Limit amount of slab poured in any period to area which can be finished with available crew. Test all slabs for level and/or drainage after same are sufficiently set. Where slabs are rough, show trowel marks, or are out of level due to poor finishing, curing or inaccurate screening, grind, refinish or replace same as directed by Owner or Architect. 1.5 GRADES, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES - SLABS A. Slope all slabs requiring drainage approximately 1/4" per ft. unless otherwise shown. B. A local levelness and flatness tolerance of 1/8" in 10 foot maximum deviation from design surface will be permitted on concrete slabs with an overall general conformity from design grade of + or - 3/4" of final elevations shown on Drawings. 1. ACI F-Number equivalent: FF 50 / FL 30 (for slabs on grade) 2. ACI F-Number equivalent: FF 50 (for elevated slabs) 1.6 MOISTURE / HUMIDITY CONTROL - SLAB DRYING A. Moisture Testing: Coordinate curing process with slab moisture/humidity requirements imposed by other sections of these specifications related to applied finishes. 1. There shall be NO water allowed to be added to slab concrete mix from any of the following: a. Moisture standing on under slab vapor barrier prior to pour. b. Moist curing process. c. Rain or other water sources subsequent to initial pour. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are SECTION 03 35 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Cleaner: Kemiko Neutra Clean. B. Chemical Floor Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent. "Burke-O-Lith" or approved equal. C. Patching Compounds: Two component cement based and acrylic polymer compound, 5,000 psi @ 28 days minimum. Burke Acrylic Patch, Epolith Patcher, or Sonopatch by Sonneborn. D. Interior Sealer: Tnemec Series 287 — EnvirPox, Clear. E. Exterior Sealer: Low VOC, Silane/Siloxane penetrating water-repellent sealer. Prosoco, SureKlean Weather Seal, Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INTERIOR SLAB FINISH A. Interior Slab: Shall be floated, power troweled and steel troweled to a smooth, dense, thoroughly consolidated hard finish. (The final troweling shall be done when the trowel produces a ringing sound when passing over the surface.) 1. Particular caution shall be exercised in areas scheduled to have architecturally exposed floor slabs. Troweling shall produce a uniformly smooth and consistent finish. Blemished slabs in these areas may not be patched and will require replacement. B. At slabs to receive mortar bed and ceramic tile, steel trowel then finish with fine broom. C. Use of"dryer" not allowed. D. Strip all curing compound from slabs receiving additional finishes. E. At slabs to receive sealer: 1. Provide specified moisture testing to confirm slab moisture emission meets sealer manufacturer's requirements prior to sealer application. 2. Acid etch prepare slab per sealer manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Provide on coat of specified sealer per manufacturer's instructions at: a. All slabs scheduled to have "sealer". 3.2 SLAB CURING A. See Section 03 30 00. B. Chemical Hardener Finish 1. Apply two coats liquid chemical hardener finish to exposed dry interior slabs not receiving other finishes or sealers. 3.3 LEVELING/FILLING/PATCHING A. Slabs which exceed the stated grade tolerances must be leveled with an approved epoxy concrete floor leveling compound prior to installation of,finish flooring material as part of concrete contract. B. Architecturally exposed slabs which exceed the stated grade tolerances must be SECTION 03 35 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING replaced. 1. Maximum surface pitting: 1/32" in any dimension. 2. Maximum surface cracking: None. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 35 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 19 CONCRETE SLAB GRINDING, COLORING & POLISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the preparation and patching, mechanical grinding, staining, polishing and finish sealing of concrete floor slabs to produce a final, finished floor surface. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 D. Concrete Finishing Section 03 35 00 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Products List: Before ordering, submit detailed list of materials proposed for use on work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.5 LOW VOC COMPLIANCE A. All products used under this Section shall meet the limitations for emission of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) per Section 01 61 16— Special Requirements — Sustainable Building Practices. 1.6 TEST SAMPLE MOCK-UP A. Provide a minimum of (2) 4' x 4' test areas of grinding, polishing, staining and sealing process at a location designated by Architect. B. The test area shall be used to fine tune the color and finish process. The contractor shall be prepared to work with the Architect to adjust the process to the point of acceptance by the Architect prior to commencement of full work on balance of the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Densifier Treatment: 1. Lythic Densifier, by Lythic Solutions, Inc. B. Concrete Dye: 1. Lythic Duet water based dye. 2. Color: To be selected by Owner. B. Concrete Sealer: SECTION 03 35 19 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 19 CONCRETE SLAB GRINDING, COLORING & POLISHING 1. Lythic SPD Protector by Lythic Solutions, Inc. C. Patching compounds: See Section 03 35 00. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Products: Non-corrosive, neutral pH, of type recommended by concrete treatment manufacturer. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Heavy duty commercial planetary floor grinder/polisher system. 1. Minimum 600 pounds head pressure. 2. 3 or 4 head, counter rotating, variable speed. 3. Dust extraction system: Pre-separator, squeegee attachments with minimum 300 cfm flow rate. 4. Grinding heads: Metal bonded 16, 25, 30/40, 60/80, 120/150 & 300 grit. 5. Polishing heads: Resin bonded phenolic diamonds, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1,500 & 3,000 grits. B. Hand edge grinder. 1. Dust extraction system. 2. Grinding Pads: match floor grinder. C. Burnisher: Minimum 2000 RPM. D. Appropriate equipment to be determined by the contractor based on concrete slab conditions and level of finish desired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for conditions that could adversely affect application or performance of finish; correct detrimental conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean floors; remove debris. Remove residues using non-corrosive cleaning products. 1. Remove existing coatings using planetary machine. If metal pads are required, grind using 6, 16, 30, and 50 grit metal pads. 3.3 POLISHING A. Preliminary Grinding: Provide initial grinding using successively finer metal pad grinding heads and a systematic grinding pattern to produce a uniformly flat surface without grinding marks, ridges or gouges. 1. Grind floor using 30/40 grit metal pads. (If required by slab) 2. Grind floor using 60/80 grit metal pads. 3. Grind floor using grit semi-metal pads. 4. Cut Level (Depth of Cut) to be Class B - Fine Aggregate (expose only fine aggregate). 5. Scrub and rinse or vacuum floor between each grinding step as appropriate for process and equipment used. 6. Appropriate grinding steps to be determined by the contractor based on concrete slab conditions and level of finish desired. B. Polishing: 1. Stage 1 polish to provide smooth, even matte finish using 200 grit resin SECTION 03 35 19 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 19 CONCRETE SLAB GRINDING, COLORING & POLISHING pads. 2. Stage 2 polish to provide smooth, even satin finish using 400 grit resin pads. 3. Stage 3 polish to provide smooth, even semigloss finish using 800 grit resin pads. 4. Stage 4 polish to provide smooth, even high gloss finish using 1500 grit resin pads. Burnish with hogs hair or black pad. 5. Polish grind to produce a Level 3 (800 or higher grit) shine. Produce an average minimum Gloss Reading of 60 (medium shine), to be approved on mock-up. 6. Polish edges commensurately with hand polishers to match main floor. 7. Scrub and rinse or vacuum floor between each polishing step as appropriate for process and equipment used. 8. Appropriate grinding steps to be determined by the contractor based on concrete slab conditions and level of finish desired. C. Burnish: 1. Burnish finish to produce reflected image from side lighting at 100 feet. 3.4 DYEING (Verify sequencing of dyeing with polishing procedure during mock-up) A. Apply dye in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using CO2 sprayer with conical tip, hand rag or roller as required for desired effect. B. Use overlapping circular motion to ensure consistent coverage. C. Wait 1 to 2 minutes, then wipe small area with dry white cloth; ensure color acceptability. D. If additional dye is required, allow first coat to dry before application of second coat. E. Remove excess dye using auto scrubber. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE TREATMENT A. Thoroughly clean floors; remove debris. Remove residues using non-corrosive cleaning products. B. Concrete Densifier: 1. Apply a field test of surface densifier at a location chosen by architect. 2. Review results with architect to verify if application to entire floor is recommended. Proceed as directed. a. Apply treatment in single application. b. Distribute using exploded-tip bristle broom to uniform coverage. c. Allow to air dry. d. At ambient temperatures above 95 degrees F, keep surfaces hydrated for one hour after application. e. After drying, remove un-reacted material using broom. C. Surface Sealer: 1. Apply two (2) coats of sealer per manufacturer's printed directions. 2. Use T-bar applicator and micro-head. 3. Allow minimum one hour drying time between applications. 4. Application to be performed by a certified applicator, certified by the product manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work with non-staining sheet coverings. SECTION 03 35 19 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 35 19 CONCRETE SLAB GRINDING, COLORING & POLISHING END OF SECTION SECTION 03 35 19 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 54 13 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this section includes installation and finishing of all interior gypsum cement underlayment at locations shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1. See Drawings for assembly thickness. B. Contractor to furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment for installation of underlayment systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Finishes Division 9 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installations to be by authorized applicator only. B. Installer shall use only equipment authorized for application by manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, unopened packages, and protected from exposure to the elements. B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. 1.5 BUILDING CONDITIONS A. Building to be enclosed and maintained at a temperature above 50° F before, during and after installation. B. Provide adequate ventilation and heat, as required, until underlayment is dry. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data per the requirements of Section 01 33 00. B. Provide shop drawings describing locations, screeding, and edge detailing. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Slump Test: 1. Provide a slump test as underlayment is being pumped using a 2 inch by 4 inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 inches plus or minus 1 inch diameter. B. Field Samples: 1. At least one set of 3 molded cube samples shall be taken from each day's pour during floor underlayment installation. 2. Test cubes in accordance with ASTM C 472. 3. Distribute test results per the requirements of Section 01 45 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Cement Floor Underlayment: 1. Gyp-Crete 2000 / 3.2K as manufactured by the Maxxon Corporation, Hamel, MN or approved equal. SECTION 03 54 13 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 03 54 13 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi B. Subfoor Primer: Maxxon Floor Primer. C. Sealer: Maxxon Overspray. 2.2 MIX DESIGN: A. Sand Aggregate: Sand shall be 1/8 inch or less, washed masonry or plaster sand meeting manufacturers standard requirements. (Maxxon Corporation Sand Specification 101 or approved equal) B. Mix Water: Provide potable water, free of impurities. 2.3 MIXING A. Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product manufacturer recommendation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition and Cleaning of Subfloor: 1. Subfloor shall be structurally sound. 2. Contractor shall clean subfloor of all mud, oil grease, and other contaminants prior to installation. B. Leak Prevention: 1. Fill cracks and voids with a quick setting patching or caulking material where leakage of floor underlayment may occur. C. Priming Subfloor: 1. Prime subfloor per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide subfloor priming in accordance with the type of substrate, using multiple coats as required by manufacturer. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Locate expansion joints over expansion joints in concrete substrate. 2. Install expansion joints to the same width as that of the concrete substrate. 3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM CONCRETE FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT A. Scheduling: 1. Do not begin floor underlayment until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors and other fenestration. 2. Install floor underlayment after drywall installation, unless otherwise noted on drawings. B. Application: 1. Place floor underlayment over substrate to thickness shown on Drawings and per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. a. See Drawings for Floor Assemblies. b. Coordinate underlayment thickness with slopes to drains as shown on Drawings. 2. Spread and screed floor underlayment to a smooth surface. 3. Except at authorized joints, place floor underlayment as continuously as possible until application is complete so that no floor underlayment slurry SECTION 03 54 13 -2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 03 54 13 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT is placed against a floor underlayment product that has already obtained its initial set. C. Drying: 1. Provided continuous ventilation and adequate heat to rapidly remove moisture from the area until the floor underlayment is dry. 2. Barricade floor underlayment areas for proper curing. 3. Test for dryness and curing according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT SEALING A. Sealing: 1. Seal all areas scheduled to receive glue/mortar down floor goods according the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2. Any floor underlayment where the surface has been damage shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. 3. Install floor underlayment sealer prior to the installation of glue down floor goods. 4. Review floor underlayment sealer with the requirements of the flooring manufacturers. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these floor underlayment sealing recommendations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. General Contractor must place planking over underlayment, if subjected to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads. B. Gypsum underlayment requires finished floor covering. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 54 13 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04 21 00 Mechanically Attached Masonry Veneer 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry SECTION 04 21 00 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes brick masonry units, reinforcing ties,flashing, grout and mortar required for mechanically attached masonry veneer. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 D. Cast-in Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 E. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 F. Flashing Section 07 60 00 G. Structural Notes See Drawings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Sections 01 42 19. B. Mason contractor is responsible for moisture content of brick after delivery to job site until fully cured in completed assembly. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the following required tests per the requirements of Section 01 45 00. 1. Masonry test prisms per IBC Chapter 21. 1.4 STANDARDS A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 / TMS 402; Sections 6.1 and 6.2. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Certification: Prior to delivery of masonry materials to the job site, deliver to the Architect a letter from the manufacturer of the proposed masonry units certifying that all such units to be delivered to the job site are in strict conformance with the provisions of this Section. C. Submit mix designs to Architect for review. D. Samples: 1. Brick: Furnish five (5) individual bricks showing maximum variations in color and texture to Architect for review. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not apply Portland Cement Mortar to surfaces that contain frost. Do not install work in areas where temperature is below 40 degrees F. If heating is necessary maintain temperature above freezing until mortar and grout have cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Brick Masonry Units: SECTION 04 21 00 - 1 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 21 00 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER 1. Facing Brick complying with ASTM C 216, latest revision, and OSSC Chapter 21, Grade SW, Type FBX. 2. Size: Nominal 4"X4"X8" 3. Solids: Shapes as required at exposed edges - see Drawings. 4. Manufacturer/Color/Texture: See Drawings. B. Reinforcing steel to have minimum yield stress of 60,000 psi. See Section 03 20 00. C. Mortar to be type S or M. 28 day compressive strength to be 2,000 psi. 1. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard color range. D. Wall Anchor Ties: Dur-o-Wall D/A 213S system or Hohmann & Barnard HB200-SIS with Seismiclip Interlock system, and (at metal studs) Textroseal. E. Screws to Studs: Two (2)galvanized or polymer coated#10 sheet metal screws with minimum penetration of(3) exposed threads through studs at each anchor. F. Flashing: Perm-A-Barrier, wall flashing by W.R. Grace. G. Masonry Cleaner: EaCo Chem NMD 80 detergent-based masonry detergent. H. Masonry Sealer: Enviroseal-Duraseal acrylic, penetrating water-repellent sealer, complying with VOC requirements per Section 01 61 16. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Do not begin masonry work until the horizontal and vertical alignment of the foundations have been checked. C. Verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on Drawings. Report errors or inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with work of this Section. B. Verify all required blockouts and their locations. 3.3 LAYOUT A. Check horizontal layout of the wall by first laying out units without mortar and adjust to minimize masonry unit cutting at windows, doors, pilasters, etc. B. Notify Architect when initial layout is complete. 3.4 MIXING MORTAR A. Use a mechanical mixer of one sack minimum capacity. Mix mortar for at least three minutes after all materials have been added. Mix only as much mortar as can be used in one hour after water has been first mixed into the batch. Do not re-temper mortar. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Per IBC/OSSC Chapter 2104 to 2104.7. B. General: 1. Lay up all brick walls in running bond plumb, level and true to the lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Do not use chipped or broken units. If any such units are discovered in the finished wall, the Architect will require their removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the SECTION 04 21 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 21 00 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER Owner. 2. Prior to laying the first course, clean the top surface of the concrete foundation or floor of all laitance, loose aggregate and other material that would prevent the mortar or grout from achieving satisfactory bond. C. Dampening: 1. Store all masonry units on the job site so that they are kept off the ground and protected from the rain. 2. Wetting the units will not be permitted, except when hot and dry weather exists causing the units to be warm to the touch, and then only the surface may be wetted with a light fog spray. D. Laying up: 1. Solidly bed each course in mortar. 2. Butter entire vertical surface of units at end joints. 3. Bond each course at corners and intersections. 4. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the horizontal and vertical face joints shall be nominal 1/2" thick. Tool joints when thumbprint hard with a round bar to produce a dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block at the edges. Mortar joints in surfaces to be plastered, stuccoed, furred or covered with other masonry shall be struck flush. 5. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed with fresh mortar, and then re-tooled. 6. Prevent mortar in excess of 3/8" from extending from the joints and falling into wall cavity. 7. For masonry to be reinforced and grouted,align all vertical cells to maintain a clear, unobstructed system of flues. 8. When work is temporarily disconnected,step back brick for joining with future work - toothing not permitted. Cover tops of all walls exposed to weather. Before renewing work, remove loose mortar and thoroughly wet exposed joints. 9. While laying, keep exposed faces of masonry units free from mortar. Clean masonry after wall is complete. E. Anchorage: Attach brick veneer to backing with metal veneer ties in the following manner-whichever is the more restrictive: 1. Per IBC/OSSC Section 1405.5(ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 402;Sections 6.1 and 6.2.) , unless noted otherwise on Structural Drawings. 2. Per rated Fire Resistive assembly listing - see Drawings. F. Flashing: Clean surfaces of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture flashing materials. Place through-wall and cavity flashing on a bed of mortar then cover with mortar. G. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints and first course immediately above all flashing. Space weep holes twenty-four(24) inches on center maximum. H. Sealant Recess: Leave joints around outside perimeter of exterior doors, window frames and other openings. Depth: Uniform 3/4"Width 1/4" to 3/8". Expansion Joints: Provide vertical temperature expansion joints with compressible closed cell neoprene strips adjacent inside corners and at maximum 20 foot intervals in straight walls. Confirm exact locations with Architect and as shown on the Drawings. J. Tooling: 1. Tool all joints to a dense, smooth surface, with a concave profile. 3.6 CLEANING & SEALING SECTION 04 21 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 21 00 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER A. Promptly clean work as it progresses so as to minimize final cleaning. Do not leave mortar scum to dry on faces of material. B. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. C. Prior to sealing unglazed masonry,clean all new and existing masonry with masonry cleaner per manufacturer's printed instructions to remove all job dirt, stains and excess mortar. Remove any efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide spray-applied damproofing per manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION SECTION 04 21 00 - 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes cement masonry units, reinforcing, grout, mortar, and sealer. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Concrete Reinforcing Section 03 20 00 D. Structural Notes See Drawings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Mason contractor is responsible for moisture content of block after delivery to job site until fully cured in completed assembly. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the following required tests per the requirements of Section 01 45 00: 1. Provide testing and inspection per I.B.C. Chapter 17, Section 2105.2.2.2, and Structural Notes on Drawings. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Concrete Masonry Association TEK information series recommendations. B. I.B.0 Chapter 21. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Certification: Prior to delivery of masonry materials to the job site, deliver to the Architect a letter from the manufacturer of the proposed masonry units certifying that all such units to be delivered to the job site are in strict conformance with the provisions of this Section. C. Submit mix designs to Architect for review. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Cement Masonry Units 1. Complying with ASTM C90, latest revision, Grade N, Type 1, medium weight 50/50 with a blend of aggregates that conform to ASTM C331 and ASTM C33. Dry to intermediate humidity condition per table No. 1, fm = 1,900 psi. 2. Linear shrinkage not greater than .35, not to exceed amount recommended in ASTM C426. 3. Moisture content not to exceed 30% of total absorption. 4. Unit types -See Drawings to verify locations and colors: a. Size: 8x8x16 b. Texture: Smooth SECTION 04 22 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY c. Color: Gray. d. Other: n/a 5. Unit configurations: a. Provide all specialty unit configurations including returns, bond beams, open end, half, lintel, single sash, corner, etc., blocks as required by structural and finished exposure. b. Provide textured block ends where required to match face texture. B. Reinforcing steel to have minimum yield stress of 60,000 PSI. See Structural Drawings for requirements. C. Mortar to be type M or S per ASTM C 270, with proportion by volume per manufacturer's recommendations to reach required compressive strength of 1,800 psi @ 28 days. D. Grout to be per ASTM C476, with proportion by volume per manufacturer's recommendations to reach required compressive strength of 2,000 psi @ 28 days. E. Flashing: Perm-A-Barrier, wall flashing by W.R. Grace. F. Masonry Cleaner: Prosoco, SureKlean, Custom Masonry Cleaner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MIXING MORTAR A. Use a mechanical mixer of one sack minimum capacity. Mix mortar for at least three minutes after all materials have been added. Mix only as much mortar as can be used in one hour after water has been first mixed into the batch. Do not re-temper mortar. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Per IBC/OSSC Chapter 2104 to 2104.7. Fully grout walls per Structural Drawings. B General: Lay up all walls in running bond, plumb, level and true to the lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Do not use chipped or broken units. C. Dampening 1. Store all masonry units on the job site so that they are kept off the ground and protected from the rain. 2. Wetting the units will not be permitted, except when hot and dry weather cause the units to be warm to the touch, and then only the surface may be wetted with a light fog spray. D. Laying Up 1. Place all units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. 1/2"- 5/8". 2. Align all vertical cells to maintain a clear, unobstructed system of flues. 3. Hold racking to an absolute minimum. 4. No block shall be laid when temperatures are below 40°F. Do not build on work having a film of water or frost on its surfaces. Take precautions to protect green masonry from freezing or inclement weather. 5. Provide sloped mortar tops on all walls exposed to weather. 6. While laying, keep exposed faces of block free from mortar. Clean block after wall is complete. E. Flashing: Clean surfaces of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture flashing materials. Place through-wall and cavity flashing on a bed of mortar then cover with mortar. F. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints and first course immediately SECTION 04 22 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY above all flashing. Space weep holes twenty-four (32) inches on center maximum. G. Sealant Recess: Leave joints around outside perimeter of exterior doors, window frames and other openings. Depth: Uniform 3/4" Width 1/4" to 3/8". H. Reinforcement: Install all reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. Fully embed reinforcement in grout, not in mortar or mortar joints. Provide all required metal accessories to ensure accurate alignment of steel during grout filling operations. Maintain 1/4-inch clear between reinforcing bars and masonry units. F. Tooling: 1. Tool all joints to a dense, smooth surface, with a concave profile. 3.3 GROUTING A. General: Perform all grouting in strict accordance with the provisions as described in Chapter 21 of the IBC. B. Timing: Do not grout until masonry has cured at least 24 hours. C. Consolidation: Consolidate all grout at time of pouring by puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling all cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before plasticity is lost. D. Grout walls per structural drawings. 3.4 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide 1/2" wide concrete masonry unit expansion joints centered and in coursing and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide neoprene gasket at center of block joint. C. Seal the joint with closed cell backer rod and sealant per Section 07 90 00. 3.5 CLEANING & SEALING A. Promptly clean work as it progresses so as to minimize final cleaning. Do not leave mortar scum to dry on faces of material. B. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. C. Prior to sealing/finishing unglazed masonry, clean with masonry cleaner per manufacturer's printed instructions to remove all job dirt, stains and excess mortar. Remove any efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturer's recommendations. D. When not scheduled to receive other finishes, provide spray-applied damp- proofing per manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION SECTION 04 22 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 5 METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 30 00 Metal Decking 05 40 00 Light Gauge Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish, fabricate, mark for erection identification, pack, crate, or otherwise properly prepare for shipment, ship to the site and erect all structural steel indicated on the Drawings, described in these Specifications, or otherwise required for proper completion of the Work. 1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE: A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Structural Notes Structural Drawings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01 42 19 and the following standards: 1. Erection, fabrication and identification shall conform to AISC Steel Construction Manual, AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel, and IBC Chapter 22. 2. Welding shall conform to ANSI/AWS D 1.1 specifications for Structural Steel Welding, latest edition. 3. Welders will be certified. 4. Fabricator must be designated as an AISC-Certified Plant and shall be registered with and approved by permit jurisdiction. B. Contractor shall coordinate and provide access for special inspection of all field welding or torquing to the satisfaction of governing authorities requirements and per Section 01 45 00 and Structural Notes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with the pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings 1. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail number on the Drawings. 2. Should the Contractor elect to change sequence of erection or other details of field erection, submit necessary revised Shop Drawings to the Architect for review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rolled steel sections minimum standard: 1. Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992, grade 50 2. Plates in moment resisting frames: ASTM A572. grade 50 3. Split bearing plates for beams: ASTM A572, grade 50 4. All other steel: ASTM A36 B. Cold formed steel tubing: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B. fy=46ksi SECTION 05 12 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL C. Steel pipe: Comply with ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. All threaded rods: ASTM A36. E. No unidentified steel shall be used. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Concrete Anchors: 1. Epoxy Anchors: Hilti HY-150, Powers RAWL Power Fast, Simpson ET or SET. a. Unless noted, install threaded ASTM A193 B7 rods into clean, dry holes to embed depth as shown on drawings. Comply with manufacturer's ICBO report for hole diameter. If embed depths are not shown, use manufacturer's minimum depths. Fill hole with enough epoxy to fill all void spaces and insert rod with clockwise twisting motion. b. Do not place when epoxy or concrete is less than 50 degrees F, unless cold weather products are utilized. 2. Expansion Anchors: Hilti Kwik Bolt-II, Power RAWL-Stud, Ramset/RedHead Trubolts or Simpson Wedge All. a. Full bearing contact for 3-inch minimum around each anchor must be provided between the face of concrete and of concrete and the anchored assembly. b. Do not cut main reinforcing or breakout back surface when drilling holes. 3. Headed Concrete Studs: ASTM A108. B. High Strength Bolts: 1. Bearing bolts: ASTM A325N or ASTM A490 as noted on the drawings. Install "snug" and torque to 50 ft. lbs. unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 2. Slip Critical bolts: ASTM A490SC. Install by "turn of the nut" method. C. Welding: 1. Filler metals shall meet AWS A5 Specifications. 2. Electrodes shall be 70 ksi compatible with base metal, welding process and position. Low hydrogen electrodes for SMAW. Meet minimum toughness CVN value of 20 ft. lbs. at -20 degrees F for all welding of moment frames and full penetration welds. Do not mix weld electrodes that reduce the CVN value of welds. 3. GMAW field welding not allowed. GMAW shop welding using short circuiting transfer not allowed. 4. SMAW is not allowed to be placed over FCAW on pre-existing structural steel welded connections. Use only FCAW on pre-existing structural welds unless contractor provides material testing of existing structural welds to confirm SMAW was used. D. Bearing Pads: 1. All Teflon slide bearings shall be Dynaion Slide Bearings by JVI, Inc. 2. All bearing pads shall be Masticord bearing pads by JVI, Inc. 2.3 FINISHING PRODUCTS A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123, ASTM A386 commercial class, hot dipped. B. Galvanizing repair: ASTM A780. C. Galvanized fasteners: ASTM A153. D. Zink Oxide rust inhibiting primer. SECTION 05 12 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. General: 1. All workmanship, details of construction, etc., except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall be in conformity with all applicable articles of the AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", AISC "Code of Standard Practice", and the applicable Building Codes. Make connections as indicated or detailed, on the drawings and the reviewed Shop and Erection Drawings. 2. All permanently exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trademarks, names, etc., exposed to view. Grind all welds. Leave in condition for finish painting. 3. Gas-cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas- cutting permitted. B. Fabrication: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 3. Make welds by the electric-arc process per AWS standards specified above. 4. Where weld size is not indicated, make weld full thickness of member. No splices, other than those indicated, will be permitted on any steel member except where written approval is obtained from the Architect. Evidence of an unauthorized splice will be cause for rejection. 5. Clean all steel work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose millscale, loose rust, accessible weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. 6. Fabrications intended to be permanently exposed to public view to be neatly fabricated, straight and true with all edges ground smooth and uniform. C. Finish: 1. Structural Steel fabrications to be shipped to site finished as follows: a. Fabrications permanently exposed to exterior or embedded in exterior masonry veneer- hot-dipped galvanized. b. Fabrications interior to the structure and intended to be finish field painted with conventional paint and permanently exposed to public view - two coats Zink Oxide primer. Each coat preceded by finish sanding of minimum 120 grit abrasive. c. Fabrications interior to the structure not intended for public view — two coats Zink Oxide primer. 2. Exceptions to finishes - Do not shop prime: a. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. SECTION 05 12 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL b. Surfaces to be field welded. c. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. d. Galvanized surfaces. D. Erection: 1. Erect all work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other work. Secure all parts in a rigid and substantial manner during construction. 2. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Erection, means and methods, and temporary shoring and bracing is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. 4. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. 5. Prior to setting base plates clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces free from bond-reducing materials, and then roughen to improve bond to surface. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 6. Bolts shall be located in the top of vertically slotted holes and the center of horizontally slotted holes, unless otherwise noted. 7. Pack non-shrink grout per Section 03 30 00 solidly between bearing surfaces to ensure no voids remain. 8. Provide inspection per 1.3 (B) above. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 12 00 - 4 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 30 00 METAL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes fabrication and installation of roll formed structural metal decking for roof and composite floors. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 C. Structural Steel Section 05 12 00 D. Painting Section 09 90 00 E. Structural Notes See Drawings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01 42 19 and the following standards: B. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): Comply with standard specifications in SDI Publication 30, "Design manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks". C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all required information in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of decking and product indicated stating that product meets referenced SDI standards. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of panels, include joining, anchorage, splice and connection locations and details. D. Welding certificates stating compliance with specified standards. E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. F. ICC / UL listing: Provide deck listing showing metal decks meet fire rating requirements as a component of fire-assembly specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SDI's "Publication 30." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top-flanged stiffening grooves confirming to SDI Publication No. 30. 1. Provide galvanized steel sheet deck panels:ASTM A446, Grade A, G 60 zinc coating class according to ASTM A525. 2. See Drawings for size and gage. B. Accessories: 1. Shear Connectors: See Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 with dry film containing a minimum of 94% zinc dust by weight. C. Welding: SECTION 05 30 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 30 00 METAL DECKING 1. Panels: Per AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 2. Studs: See Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Verco Manufacturing Co. B. Other approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Cut and neatly fit deck panels around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install panels square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SDI's "Publication 30, and requirements in this Section and the Structural Drawings. 1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. C. Field weld decking to supporting steel. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of panels. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Button punch interlocking panel edges per panel manufacturer's specifications and as required by Structural Drawings. E. Provide composite studs per Section 05210 and Structural Drawings. F. Provide temporary shoring at decking panels as required to meet deflection limitations. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency per Section 01400 to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. 1. As required by IBC Section 1701 and Structural Notes on Structural Drawings. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 30 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 40 00 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes furnishing of all materials and installation of a complete wall framing system and all backing and blocking for any wall or ceiling supported equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Requirements: 1. Steel Framing Systems: Maximum deflection of L/240 for design loads. 2. Seismic Loads: Provide steel bracing members to carry structural loads created by seismic movement of ceiling and wall systems. B. System Tolerances: 1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch variation in 8 feet from plumb, level, and true lines. 2. Do not exceed 1/16 inch offset at joints between adjacent panels within the same plane. 3. Framing shall be subject to the tolerances required by the finish materials applied thereon. See Related Sections for additional requirements. C. Materials shall comply with applicable provisions of the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. D. Comply with (SSMA) Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association Product Technical Information and ICC/ICBO report IR 4943P. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau. 4846 NE 102nd, Portland, Oregon 97220, Ph: 503-295-0333, www.nwcb.orq. Field Technical Information Publications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Welding certificates stating compliance with specified standards. D. ICC/ICBO/UL listing: Provide applicable listing showing framing systems meet fire rating requirements as a component of fire-assembly specified. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Angeles SECTION 05 40 00- 1 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 40 00 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING 2. Cenco 3. Steeler 4. Steel Systems 5. Western B. Substitute Manufacturers 1. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00, Materials and Equipment. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Standard Steel C-Studs and Track: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 645. 2. Type: Punched lateral load bearing steel C-studs. 3. Flange Profile: 1.375 inch with 1/4 inch stiffening lip. 4. Minimum Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 5. Minimum Yield Strength: 33 ksi. 6. Metal Finish: ASTM A 525, G-60 galvanized. 7. Track: Manufacturer's standard profile. B. Structural Steel C-Studs and Track 1. Industry Standard: ASTM A446. 2. Type: Punched lateral load bearing steel C-studs. 3. Flange Profile: Per manufacturer's standard profile. 4. Minimum Metal Thickness: Gage and size as shown on Drawings. 5. Minimum Yield Strength: a. 16 gage and heavier: Grade D, 50,000 psi. b. 18 gage and lighter: Grade A, 33,000 psi. 6. Metal Finish: a. ASTM A525, G-60 galvanized at exterior walls. b. Red Oxide rust inhibitive primer at interior locations. 7. Track: Manufacturer's standard profile. C. Framing Accessories: 1. Screw Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll-formed, hat shaped 25 gage, G- 60 zinc-coated steel with knurled face. 2. Steel Cold Rolled Channels: ASTM C 754, 3/4 inch and 1-1/2 inch wide, 16 gage, G-60 galvanized or black asphaltum painted steel. 3. Framing Screws: a. 26 to 20 gage stud & track: #7 diamond point pan head. b. 20 to 14 gage stud &track: #8 to 10 self drilling pan or hex head. c. Drywall to stud: Type S, bugle head, diamond point or self drilling. 4. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Gun fired low velocity fasteners by Hilti, ITW, Ramset, or approved equal. Install per manufacturer and ICC/ICBO requirements. 5. Welding: Per AWS D1.3 - "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". a. Electrodes: AWS 6013 or 7014. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. If applicable, before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing,or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed- on fireproofing. SECTION 05 40 00- 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 40 00 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING B. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much fireproofing as needed to complete installation of Work of this Section without reducing thickness of fireproofing below that required to obtain fire-resistive rating indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Wall Framing Systems: 1. Install in conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions using screw and/or welded joints. No wire tied joints allowed. a. Cut framing members by saw or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Comply with ASTM C 754 and fire rating requirements. 3. Install 20 gage C-studs to support: a. Door frames. b. Grab bars. c. Electrical and Mechanical equipment. d. Casework. e. Ceramic or stone tile walls. 4. See Drawings for additional locations of heavy gage track and studs. 5. Provide lateral bracing of all interior non-bearing partitions in conformance with NWCB Field Technical Info bulletin 200-501. B. Installation of wall backing: 1. Screw apply sheet steel backing panels to studs. C. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Replace damaged and defective wall and ceiling framing members. 2. Remove all debris from job-site. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 40 00-3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide all structural steel, miscellaneous metal and metal fabrications, complete, in place, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation and not specifically called for under other Sections of this Project Manual. B. Finishing of all steel fabrications and fasteners intended to be permanently exposed to view. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1. Welding shall conform to AWS specifications for Structural Steel Welding Spec. D1.1, latest edition. Welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to AWS Specification AWS D12.1, Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, latest edition. All welders shall be certified. 2. All cold-formed members, material and fabrication shall conform to applicable sections of IBC. B. Contractor shall coordinate and provide access for special inspection of all field welding or torqueing to the satisfaction of governing authorities requirements and per Section 01 45 00. C. Contractor shall obtain all testing and inspections as required by IBC and local jurisdiction amendments. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. The contractor shall submit prior to fabrication Shop Drawings of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. Include plans, sections,elevations, and details as needed. C. Three samples of all finishes specified in part 2.4 below. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Metal surfaces, general: For fabrication of the work of this Section which will be exposed to view, use only those materials which are smooth and free from surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, rust and roughness. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Steel plates: ASTM A36. B. Steel bars and bar-sized shapes: ASTM A36. SECTION 05 50 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50. D. Steel plates to be bent or cold formed: ASTM A283, Grade C. E. Steel tubing, welded, or seamless: ASTM A500, Grade B. F. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108, grade as selected by the fabricator. G. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336. H. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A924, with G90 zinc coating. Stainless steel sheets: AISI Type 304 (US 18-8) with number 4 finish. J. Stainless steel plates, shapes, & bars: AISI Type 304L (US 18-8). K. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, type E or S as selected, Grade B. L. Light Gage Steel, 54mi1 and larger to be Fy=50ksi; 43 mil and smaller to be Fy=33ksi. M. Electrodes for steel welding: ASTM E-70XX series. N. Weathering steel: ASTM A242. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Standards: All fasteners shall comply with the following unless specifically indicated otherwise on Structural Drawings. 1. Anchor Bolts: Non-headed type w/ heavy hexagonal nuts, ASTM A307. 2. Bolts and nuts: Regular hexagon-head type, ASTM A307, Grade A; High-Strength Bolts, ASTM A325N 3. Threaded Rod: A-36, galvanized. 4. Lag bolts: Square-head type, Fed. Spec. FF-B-561. 5. Stainless Steel Bolts & Nuts & Lags: AISI Type 316. 6. Machine screws: Cadmium plated steel, Fed. Spec. FF-S-92. 7. Wood screws: Flat-head carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF-S-111. 8. Plain washers: Round, carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF-W-92. 9. Stainless Steel Plain Washers: AISI Type 316. 10. Concrete Anchors: a. Expansion type: Hilti Kwik Bolt II, Power RAWL-stud, Ramset/RedHead Trubolt, Simpson WedgeAll. b. Epoxy type: Hilti HY-150, Powers RAWL Power Fast (Std. set), Simpoon ET or SET. 11. CMU Grouted Masonry anchorage devices: Hilti HY-150, Simpson SET. 12. Toggle bolts: Tumble-wing type, Fed. Spec. FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 13. Lock washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF-W-84. 2.4 FINISHING PRODUCTS A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123, ASTM A386 commercial class, hot dipped. B. Galvanizing repair: ASTM A780. C. Galvanized fasteners: ASTM A153 D. Zink Oxide rust inhibiting primer. Verify compatibility with finish coat per Section 09 90 00. E. All finish products shall be VOC per Section 01 61 16. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. General: SECTION 05 50 00 - 2 The Adrienne-Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1. All workmanship, details of construction, etc., except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall be in conformity with all applicable articles of the AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", AISC "Code of Standard Practice", and the applicable Building Codes. Make connections as indicated or detailed, on the drawings and the approved Shop and Erection Drawings. All exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trade marks, names, etc.,exposed to view. Grind all welds. Leave in condition for finish painting. 2. Gas-cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members as authorized by the Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas cutting permitted. 3. Special care is to be taken for all metal fabrications intended to be permanently exposed to view while cutting, splicing, bending, drilling, punching and welding to produce accurate, square, clean, tight-fitting joints where shown on the Drawings. B. Fabrication: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Make welds by the electric-arc process. 3. Where weld size is not indicated, make weld full thickness of member. No splices, other than those indicated, will be permitted on any steel member except where written authorization is obtained from the Architect. Evidence of an unauthorized splice will be cause for rejection. 4. Concealed fabrications: Clean all steel work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose millscale, loose rust, accessible weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. 5. Exposed fabrications: Grind smooth all welds permanently exposed to public view. Remove all rust and scale by power tool clean to bare metal [SSPC- SP 11], or abrasive blasting to SSPC-SP5 commercial grade of cleanliness. C. Finish: 1. Miscellaneous Steel fabrications to be shipped to site finished as follows: a. Fabrications permanently exposed to the exterior - hot-dipped galvanized. Where indicated on the Drawings, additionally painted with one coat of shop applied primer compatible with finish coat as specified in Section 09 90 00. b. Fabrications embedded in exterior concrete or masonry-hot-dipped galvanized. c. Fabrications interior to the structure and intended to be permanently exposed to public view-two coats of shop applied primer compatible with finish coat as specified in Section 09 90 00. Each coat preceded by finish sanding of minimum 120 grit abrasive. d. Fabrications interior to the structure not intended for public view — two coats of shop applied primer compatible with finish coat as specified in Section 09 90 00. SECTION 05 50 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS e. Fabrications interior to the structure and intended to be permanently exposed to public view with two coats of clear finish as specified in Section 09 90 00. 2. Exceptions to finishes — Galvanize only, do not shop prime: a. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. b. Surfaces to be field welded. c. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 3. Exceptions to finishes — Do not galvanize or shop prime: a. Surfaces to receive clear sealer as indicated on Drawings. b. Fabrications of weathering steel. D. Erection: 1. Erect all work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other work. Secure all parts in a rigid and substantial manner during construction. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 50 00 - 4 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 17 00 Prefabricated Wood Joists & Beams 06 18 00 Glue Laminated Beams 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Custom Cabinetwork SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the erection of miscellaneous framework using lumber, plywood and other sheathing materials; and all blocking and supports necessary to join the members and anchor the framework to other construction. B. Work in this section also includes the providing of backing and blocking for any wall-supported equipment supplied by other trades or the Owner. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 B. Concrete Formwork Section 03 10 00 C. Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00 D. Prefabricated Wood Joists & Beams Section 06 17 00 E. Glue Laminated Beams Section 06 18 00 F. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 G. Building Insulation Section 07 21 00 H. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the product standards specified herein and in Section 01 42 19. B. Comply with the current edition and supplement to national design specification for wood construction. C. Plywood: APA E30K, APA Design Construction guide--residential and commercial, 1989. Product Standard PS 1-83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood or Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use-Panels, June 1988. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GRADE STAMPS A. Framing Lumber: Identify all framing lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. B. Plywood: Identify all plywood as to species,grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American Plywood Association. C. Pressure-Treated Lumber and Plywood: All materials used shall bear the Quality Control Marks with the following information: 1. Symbol of Inspection Agency and Inspector Number. 2. Symbol of Federal Housing Admin. Min. Property Standards. 3. Preservative Symbol. 4. Indicates lumber redried to 19% moisture content after treatment. 5. Number of plant charge in which material was treated. 6. Month and Year of Treatment. 7. Name of Treating Company. 8. Location of Treating Plant. 9. Indicates Treatment only was specified. D. Other: Identify all other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency listed in the reference standards, or by such other means as are approved by the Architect. SECTION 06 10 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 2"and less in thickness shall have maximum moisture content of 19%, K.D. or equal, 15% for plates, sills and header framing. B. All lumber specified or shown to be pressure treated (PT)to be KDAT, in specie and grade shown on Structural Drawings. C. All materials, unless otherwise specifically approved in advance by the Architect, shall meet or exceed the following: ITEM: DESCRIPTION: 1. Sills (on concrete) See Structural Drawings. 2. Studs & Plates See Structural Drawings. 3. Sawn Headers See Structural Drawings. 4. Joists and Rafters See Structural Drawings. 5. Posts, Built-up columns See Structural Drawings. 6. Blocking, Bridging, Backing, etc. See Structural Drawings. 7. Plywood a. Roof & Wall Sheathing APA, PS 1, ICC-ES -108, Douglas-fir, C-D grade, exterior glue. See Structural Drawings for thickness and span rating. b. Floor Sheathing APA, PS 1, ICC-ES -108, Douglas-fir, C-D grade, exterior glue. See Structural Drawings for thickness and span rating. 8. Steel Hardware See Section 05 50 00. 9. Bolts, Screws and Washers See Section 05 50 00. 10. Nails Common (except as noted), Fed. Spec. FF-N- 11 (hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel (S/S)at all exterior locations or in contact with pressure treated (PT) lumber — Do not mix galvanized and S/S in contact with PT lumber). 11. Framing Connectors Simpson with Z-MAX galvanized coating per ASTM A90, 1.85 oz. zinc, or stainless steel. 12. Pressure Treatment a. Non-visible Pressure treatment to be waterborne type, as recommended and in strict conformance with the American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) Standard U1 — Commodity Specification A or F, for intended Use Category Type (UC), location and wood specie. b. Visible Pressure treatment of lumber to be permanently exposed to public view to utilize products and processes that result SECTION 06 10 00 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY in no discoloration or damage to lumbers natural color or texture and, that accepts linseed oil based semi-transparent stains. PermaPost Hi-Clear II; two-component mineral spirits-based IPBC/Permethrin; Concentration/Penetration: .006pcf Permethrin, .035 pcf IPBC / 0 to 0.6 inch. 13. Wood Preservative Match pressure treatment solution. (For field cut ends of PT members) 14. Vent Screens Vinyl coated fiberglass screen barring access to birds and insects. 15. Construction Adhesive Low VOC per Section 01 61 16. 16. Sill Sealer See Section 07 21 00. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as indicated on the Drawings, shall be new, suitable for intended use, and subject to the review of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Frame as required for the installation and support of plumbing and pipes, ducts and conduit. B. Provide PT lumber and plywood at all locations in direct contact with earth, concrete or masonry or as otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Accurately lay out, cut, fit and erect all framing true to lines and dimensions. Erect framing plumb and level, unless otherwise shown. Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Adequately anchor all framing as shown or specified. D. Brace all structures adequately during erection period, as well as final in-place condition. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fitted, accurately set to required lines, level, plumb and secured rigidly in place at bearings and connections. E. Temporary shoring and bracing is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. F. Notch all rafters and roof blocking as indicated on Drawings to provide a continuous ventilation path at all insulated roofs. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Protection During Construction: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces, equipment, and facilities to remain,from damage during construction. 3.3 LAYOUT A. Coordinate all layout of all ceiling, wall and roof framing to provide for indicated placement of suspended ceilings, electrical and mechanical work. 3.4 CUTTING AND NOTCHING A. Carpenters to do all cutting of structural members for other trades. B. Cutting and notching of joists not allowed unless shown on drawings. 1" diameter SECTION 06 10 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY hole may be drilled in the center 1/3 of the member depth. All other holes to be approved. C. Studs may be notched in the lower 1/5 of the height of stud for electric and plumbing pipes but no part of notch is to be deeper than 25% of width of stud. Holes of diameters up to 1/3 width of stud may be drilled in studs but not in center 1/3 of their height. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Beams, joists and rafters set "crown" up. B. Treated lumber, cut after treatment, and the ends of all posts in concealed locations and in contact with concrete, masonry or earth, to receive two (2) coats of a concentrated solution of treating preservatives used, saturating all cut surfaces and bolt holes. C. Lumber of nominal size, unless indicated "NET", shown on Drawings or as specified. D. Where a size is not shown on Drawings, or additional support is deemed necessary, request size from Architect. E. Stud Wall Framing: 1. Bottom plate: Pressure treated 2 x as shown on Drawings. Anchor with 5/8" x 12" anchor bolts at 48" o.c. and 6" from end of piece unless otherwise noted on structural drawings. For non-bearing partitions on slab, power driven ramset 7/32" d x 3" drive pins at 24" on center. See Structural Drawings for more stringent shear wall anchorage. 2. Spacing: a. Exterior and interior bearing and/or shear walls: 16"on center unless shown otherwise. 2 studs maximum (unless noted otherwise on the Drawings)at corners with drywall corner clips. Single full height stud at openings, unless noted otherwise. b. Interior, non-bearing partitions: 24"on center except, walls receiving ceramic tile finishes to be 16" on center. Interior partition wall / exterior wall intersections to use drywall clips and shall be fully insulated in the exterior wall. 3. Top plates shall be double except walls under beams may be single. Lap at all intersections and splices. Provide steel straps where plates are cut for ducts or pipes. 4. Headers shall be either double 2X with minimum R-10 rigid insulation between 2X members or double 2X with minimum R-10 rigid insulation between header and exterior sheathing. See Drawings. 5. Provide (2) studs minimum under beam ends unless otherwise shown. Provide (1) stud minimum under header ends unless otherwise shown. 6. Provide fire blocking of 2 inch nominal thick wood: a. In exterior and interior walls or partitions at ceiling, roof and floor levels but not over 10 feet on center maximum. b. In all stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces with maximum distance not over 10 feet. c. Between stair stringers at top and bottom and between studs along and in line with run of stair adjoining stud wall and partitions. d. At levels of furred ceilings and floors. 7. Provide nailing blocks and strips as required by all trades. All backing for fixtures, equipment, specialties and Owner supplied items is to be provided under this Division. 8. Miscellaneous blocking required for use of electrical and mechanical trades shall be by those trades unless otherwise stipulated or arranged for. 9. Set all exterior wall plates and party wall plates on sill sealer insulation batt and wall base air barrier flashing. SECTION 06 10 00 - 4 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY F. Curbs or Cants: Furnish wood curbs required for mechanical equipment and wood cants at all junctures of vertical and horizontal roof surfaces and as shown or noted on Architectural Drawings. G. Sheathing: 1. All plywood panels shall be placed over two or more spans with face grain perpendicular to supports, all joints staggered. 2. No surface or edge shall be exposed to the weather. Piecing will not be permitted. Minimum width 2'-0". 3. Where called for on Drawings as"Blocked" provide nominal 2"solid blocking at all panel edges. 4. Set all floor sheathing in a continuous bead of construction adhesive placed at centerline of joist. H. Fastening: 1. Nailing: Provide all builders hardware required; all nails for framing of American made, common type and penny weight specified or required. Use galvanized or aluminum nails for exterior nailing. Minimum nailing requirements for standard connections unless specifically shown or otherwise noted. No. or o/c Size of Framing Item of Fasteners Fasteners Dimensional Lumber See IBC 2304.9.1. Gypsum Sheathing As required by fire assembly. Plywood Sheathing See Structural Drawings 2. Framing Connectors: a. Provide framing connectors where required or indicated; secure with fastenings recommended by manufacturer to develop full total load reactions. 3. Bolted connections: a. At wood bolted connections where bolts bear on wood, use malleable iron washers under bolt head and nut, and where wood bears on concrete or steel cut steel washers unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings. All washer dimensions per Western Wood Use Book recommendations. b. Bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16" larger than bolt diameter. c. All nuts, bolts and washer exposed on exterior to be galvanized. Retighten all exposed bolts at completion of job. d. Install lag screws where required. Bore for threads as follows: 1/8" less for 1/4"to 1/2"diameter, 3/16"less for 5/8" diameter, 1/4" less for over 5/8"diameter. Counterbore for shank at nominal diameter. Seat by turning, soap threads before setting and install with wrench only. e. All bolts and/or fasteners used in contact with pressure treated lumber shall be hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel as specified above. DO NOT MIX GALVANIZED AND STAINLESS STEEL. 4. Miscellaneous Connectors: a. Install all miscellaneous metal items called for to be furnished under Division 5 related to carpentry. See Shop Drawings for locations and installation details. END OF SECTION SECTION 06 10 00 - 5 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 17 00 PREFABRICATED WOOD JOISTS & BEAMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the engineering, furnishing and installation of prefabricated wood chord, steel tube and plywood web trusses and micro- laminated joists and beams, including all blocking and connectors. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 C. Structural Drawings and General Notes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards 1. Comply with standards specified herein, the structural notes on the Structural Drawings, and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 2. Wood members shall be designed for the load requirements listed on structural drawings. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers with prior approval of structural engineer and architect. C. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit Shop Drawings per Section 01 33 00 for review prior to fabrications. C. Product data: 1. Prior to delivery to job site submit: a. Complete calculations, materials list, layout drawings, and installation details of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section, stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed in the state the project is located. b. A current ICC-ES or UL Report for all types of trusses, joists and beams being supplied. Also submit evidence of compliance with all items required by ICC-ES or UL Report. c. Temporary truss bracing and erection requirements: If temporary braces require elements outside the bracing system to support loading from the bracing; the amount, direction, and location of load shall be shown on the shop drawing. d. Jobsite handling and storage requirements: Trusses should be covered during storage and kept dry until the structure is weather- tight. e. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. At completion of erection, sheathing, bridging and blocking, manufacturer shall inspect system and provide to architect a written certification that the products installed meet the manufacturer's design and installation requirements. SECTION 06 17 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 17 00 PREFABRICATED WOOD JOISTS & BEAMS 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Trusses shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather prior to installation. Set on supports a minimum of 6 inches above grade. B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. C. Replacement: Damaged trusses will be rejected. Make all replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. This specification is written based on the use of products manufactured by Truss Joist/MacMillan Corporation. Other manufacturers approved by substitution request. B. Products: As shown on Structural Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENGINEERING A. Provide manufacturer's product data for manufactured wood joist and beam system based on Design Criteria listed by Building Engineer in Structural Drawings. B. Provide additional members where required to support concentrated loads imposed by mechanical, electrical, plumbing and kitchen equipment. Coordinate location of concentrated loads with architectural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical drawings. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's approved product data submittal. 3.3 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Note: Installation of trusses is not to begin until all workman involved with the erection meet and are informed of the manufacturers' erection and bracing requirements. B. Install the work of this Section straight and plumb, rigidly anchoring into position. Perform all drilling and cutting required for anchorage. C. Truss erector shall exercise extreme care during erection of roof trusses to prevent the trusses from buckling laterally. Use spreader bars for lifting trusses and provide lateral bracing as necessary. D. Temporary construction loads beyond design limits are not permitted. Erection, temporary shoring, and bracing is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. E. DO NOT cut, drill, or notch prefabricated trusses or beams without prior approval of truss manufacturer and structural engineer. F. Install joists with factory knock-out vent holes in the UP position. SECTION 06 17 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 17 00 PREFABRICATED WOOD JOISTS & BEAMS END OF SECTION SECTION 06 17 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the materials for and installation of glue-laminated beams. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 C. structural Notes See Drawings 1.3 STANDARDS A. The glued laminated structural members shall be by a manufacturer approved and licensed by the American Institute of Timber Construction as fabricating products in conformance with ANSI/AITC A190.1, and all requirements specified herewith. B. Laminated members shall be fabricated in plant equipped and experienced in this type of work, subject to Architect's review. 1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Wrap all members with protective waterproof covering prior to shipment. B. Store members delivered to job site on supports a minimum of 6 inches above grade. C. Damaged members will be rejected. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings per Section 01 30 00 for review prior to fabrications. B. Provide AITC Certificates of Conformance ANSI\ATIC A190.1, and "Structural Glue Laminated Timber and inspection Manual", AITC 200, to the Architect in triplicate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All glue-laminated members to be Douglas Fir/Larch unless otherwise noted. B. Stress Value: 24F-V8 for cantilever or continuous spans, 24F-V4 for simple spans per AITC 117. C. Provide pressure treated beams at exterior conditions per Section 06 10 00. D. Appearance grade to be "Industrial," except all exposed members to be "Premium" grade. E. All glued laminated members shall be fabricated with waterproof glue. End seal all units as soon as practical after fabrication. Surface seal prior to shipment. F. Load wrap industrial grade, individual wrap premium unless otherwise required by Contractor. G. All glued laminated members shall be notched, shaped and finished in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Fabricator shall coordinate connection details with fabricated connectors. H. All members shall be marked with a quality mark and AITC Certification. PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 06 18 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Structure shall be adequately braced for wind loads until the roof and wall units have been permanently attached together. Erection,temporary shoring and bracing is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B. Field notching or drilling of glue-lam members, other than as detailed on the shop drawings, is prohibited. END OF SECTION SECTION 06 18 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes installation of wood doors, paneling, window and door trim; manufacture and installation of wood shelves,and miscellaneous finish items, if not specified elsewhere. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Submittals Section 01 30 00 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 C. Custom Cabinetwork Section 06 41 00 D. Wood Doors Section 08 20 00 E. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 F. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Soft Woods: Standard Grading and Dressing Rules of the Western Wood Products Association, and/or the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, and/or California Redwood Association (CRA) and the Redwood Inspection Services (RIS). B. Hardwoods: Latest rules of the National Hardwood Lumber Association. C. Softwood Plywood: Latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS-1 with each sheet bearing the appropriate grade-trademark of the American Plywood Association. D. Hardwood Plywood: Latest standard of Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Asso- ciation. All plywood to be selected for uniformity of color, grain and pattern. E. Specified qualities of workmanship on mill items furnished to be as specified in the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork Standards and Guide Specifications and/or as specified herein. All materials shall conform to grading and dressing rules listed. F. Flame Spread: Interior wall and ceiling finishes shall meet the following flame spread classifications per IBC Table 803.9: 1. B -Occupancy/Sprinklered: Class C (76-200)for rooms or areas; Class C (76-200)for exit access corridors and other exit ways (lobbies)and; Class B (26-75) for vertical exits and exit passageways. 2. R-2 -Occupancy/Sprinklered: Class C (76-200)for rooms or areas; Class C (76-200)for exit access corridors and other exit ways (lobbies)and; Class C (76-200) for vertical exits and exit passageways. G. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS (Interior) A. All materials, unless otherwise specifically approved in advance by the Architect, shall meet or exceed the following: SECTION 06 20 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Item: Description: 1. Painted Trim Lumber: Preformed, plowed back, pre-primed; Paint grade Poplar, Hemlock, Pine or other sound closed grade wood species. 2. Transparent Trim Lumber: A & Better KD Western Red Cedar, no finger jointed allowed, S4S. Finished per Section 09 90 00. 3. Closet rod and bracket: a. End brackets: Philadelphia Hardware Group, 407423, white enamel steel, 1-3/8" diameter rod. b. Intermediate brackets: Philadelphia Hardware Group, 470101, white enamel steel, 1-3/8" diameter rod. c. Shelf 3/4" thick veneer plywood with hardwood self edge per Section 06 41 00. Finish per Section 09 90 00. d. Rod 1-3/8" diameter, hardwood, unfinished. 4. Blocking Provide as required for shelving or equipment. 5. Adhesives Low VOC per Section 01 61 16. 2.2 MATERIALS (Exterior) A. All materials, unless otherwise specifically approved in advance by the Architect, shall meet or exceed the following: Item: Description: 1. Soffit Lumber A & Better KD Western Red Cedar, T&G, no finger jointed allowed, S1S2E. 2.3 MOISTURE CONTENT A. Lumber All finish lumber to be kiln dried as closely as practicable to the following schedule: 1 inch or less 1-1/2 - 2 inches 90% shall not exceed 12% M.C. 15% M.C. 10% shall not exceed 15% M.C. 18% M.C. Average 12-1/2% M.C. 15-1/2% M.C. Resinous woods to be steam-treated to extract all pitch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WOOD A. All joints to be neatly made, set all wood finish straight, plumb level in true alignment, tightly fitted and rigidly fastened in one place. Finished work must be guaranteed to stand one year after completion without warping, opening of joints or other defects. B. Plow out back of all flat trim. Splice no running trim under 12 feet in length and make joints only where solid blocking or backing occurs. Fit all joints flush on face by dressing off back. No face planing, excessive sanding or cross gain sanding will be permitted. Make all trim and fascia joints with 45 degree scarf. Miter all corners unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Nailing of trims, paneling, caps etc.: Blind nail or fasten whenever possible. If face nailing is required, use only finish nails. Countersink and putty. D. Leave work clean, free from warp, twist and disfigurement. Sand smooth all interior finish material with minimum 120 grit abrasive and leave in perfect condition for SECTION 06 20 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY painter. E. Install all building specialties, hardware and equipment as specified in their respective Divisions except where installation is required of supplier or other Subcontractor. F. Sand exposed interior wood surfaces for final finish per Section 09900, Painting. G. All finish nail heads will be counter sunk. Interior nail heads will be filled and sanded. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS & HARDWARE A. See Division 8. END OF SECTION SECTION 06 20 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 41 00 CUSTOM CABINETWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the fabrication, finishing, and installation of Architectural cabinets and counter tops. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00 D. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 E. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 F. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standards and guide specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit following information: 1. Shop Drawings showing each of the items to be provided under this Section, completely detailing joinery and other construction, including anchorage. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain ambient air temperature between 65 and 80 degrees F.and relative humidity between 30 and 60 percent for 48 hours prior to and during fabricating, finishing, and installing casework. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Casework fabricator shall have 5 consecutive years of experience in fabrication of commercial and retail casework. C. The cabinetwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all required field measurements beyond their control. The General Contractor and the cabinetwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall comply with AWI Quality Standards and Specifications for Casework. B. All finish and adhesive materials shall be low VOC type in compliance with Section 01 61 16 — Special Requirements — Sustainable Building Practices. 2.2 CABINET MATERIALS (Transparent Wood Finished, European) A. General: 1. Workmanship shall comply with AWI Quality Standards and Specifications for Casework-"Premium Grade," factory finished cabinets. 2. Cabinet Style: "European (Frameless)" Full flush overlay and as detailed. 3. Door Style: See Drawings. 4. Wood species: See Drawings. 4. Finish: SECTION 06 41 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 06 41 00 CUSTOM CABINETWORK a. Exposed surfaces: Stained and transparent finished. b. Semi-Exposed: Low pressure laminate. B. Panel and Edge Materials: 1. Concealed lumber: Comply with Section 3 of AW I Quality Standards. 2. Exposed lumber: Comply with Section 3 of AW I Quality Standards. 3. Transparent Wood Finished: a. Plywood: Exterior grade plywood. b. Prefinished Hardboard (cabinet backs&drawer bottoms):ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 1 tempered, formaldehyde free, melamine finish. 4. Drawers: 3/4"plywood drawer box, melamine finished. Edges are 0.020 inch thick PVC, machine applied with hot-melt adhesive. 5. Shelves: 3/4", exterior grade plywood with melamine laminate. Edges are 0.020 inch thick PVC, machine applied with hot-melt adhesive. Adjustable in all cabinets. Full depth in base cabinets. 6. Door and drawer faces: 3/4", exterior grade plywood with high pressure laminate faces and edges. 7. Sink Counter top and moisture sensitive panels: APA, Exterior grade plywood. C. Low Pressure Laminates 1. Industry Standard: ALA 1985 2. Acceptable Material: Polyester or melamine laminate 3. Surface Finish: Smooth 4. Color: Gray D. Hardware: 1. Drawer glides: Full extension, ball bearing nylon rollers, self- closing. a. 6" deep or less: 75 lb. rating. b. Greater than 6"deep: 110 lb. rating. 2. Door hinges: Concealed, European self closing, 110 degree opening, Grass America Inc.; Blum. 3. Silencers: 3/8"diam. urethane button pad (2 each door). 4. Pulls: Wire pulls. ADA compliant, 1/2"x1-7/8"x4", EPCO MC427. 5. Shelf Standards & Supports: Knape & Vogt 330 shelf pins. 6. Locks: Corbin Camlock, 15700 series or approved equal. Brushed chrome finish. Provide locks at locations shown on Drawings. 7. All other hardware not specified shall be the Cabinetwork manufacturer's option as to type and manufacturer, subject to Owner's review. E. Adhesives: Type I Waterproof; Low VOC per Section 01 61 16. 2.4 COUNTERTOPS & BACKSPLASHES A. Quartz: 1. Homogeneous quartz, 2 cm minimum thickness, laminated 4 cm eased edge. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the SECTION 06 41 00 -2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/8-1-13 SECTION 06 41 00 CUSTOM CABINETWORK reviewed Shop Drawings, and the referenced AWI grade standards. B. When provisions of the AWI grade specified are in conflict with or are modified by the Drawings and further specifications, the modifications govern. C. Accurately fit and install all finish hardware. After fitting, remove all hardware until paint or varnish work is complete, then reinstall. Leave all hardware clean securely fastened and in working order. Cabinet doors to be mill fitted and hung. D. Assemble cabinetwork at the shop insofar as practical. Where it is necessary to cut and fit on the job, make ample allowance for cutting. E. Moisture content: Casework in storage and in place to have moisture content of between six and eleven percent, inclusive. F. Hardware: 1. See Drawings for cabinet lock locations. 3.2 FINISHING A. Transparent finished wood cabinets: 1. Prepare, stain and finish in strict conformance with manufacturers printed instructions. Finish shall be a compatible stain (if applicable) with AWI System 5, Conversion Varnish, Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) B. Substitutions of finish type shall be submitted in writing to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication and finishing of cabinetwork under this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Inspection 1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely& proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify dimension of all cabinetwork locations before fabrication. B. Installation 1. Install all components in strict accordance with the original design and the approved Shop Drawings, anchoring all items firmly into position for long life under hard use. 2. Fabricate counter tops for scribe fit to walls. 3. Fabricate all "Inset Door" type cabinetry with extended stiles for scribe fit to walls. 4. Install plumb, level and true. Shim and anchor securely. 5. Doors and drawers to operate smoothly and freely,without binding or rattling. Proper reveal gaps to be maintained. 6. Install with concealed fasteners wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips head screws to match adjacent hardware. Cap with matching screw caps. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each installed item, thoroughly clean all surfaces by using the cleaning material recommended by the manufacturer and carefully adjust all operating components for optimum operation. END OF SECTION SECTION 06 41 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 10 00 Below Grade Waterproofing 07 21 00 Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Resistive Barriers 07 42 13 Metal Siding 07 42 43 Composite Panel Siding 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding 07 54 00 Single-Ply Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 84 13 Through Penetration Firestopping 07 90 00 Sealants SECTION 07 10 00 BELOW GRADE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes waterproofing of all below grade concrete and masonry walls. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Cast-in-place Concrete Section 03 30 00 D. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Manufacturer shall review system specified here in and existing conditions for appropriateness of product for actual physical conditions. C. If modifications to the specified waterproof membrane system are recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall submit a Product Substitution Request per the requirements of Section 01 25 00. D. Applicator must be approved by the material manufacturer with at least 5 years installation experience. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data, information, and installation procedures in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit installation sequencing and suggested schedule for installation. C. Submit documentation that installer has at least five years experience installing specified product. D. Submit a sample of the warranty for Architect's review. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Prior to installing waterproof membrane, schedule a pre-installation conference with Owner's Representative, Architect, Contractor and appropriate subcontractors. See Section 01 31 19. B. Minimum Agenda for pre-installation conference shall be as follows: 1. Schedule of Work 2. Preparation of existing substrate. 3. Installation procedures 4. Staging and sequencing of the work. 5. Protection of adjacent finishes. 6. Cleaning requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer: Project specific, five (5) year written warranty from material defects. B. Installer: Two (2) year water-tightness warranty. C. Warranty shall be dated from date of contract's Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 07 10 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 10 00 BELOW GRADE WATERPROOFING 2.1 MATERIAL A. Systems based on Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing: 1. Waterproofing: Tremco; Paraseal, HDPE/Bentonite Sheet Membrane Dual Waterproofing System. 2. Protection board: Tremco; TREMDrain 1000 Series, Multi- Composite Drainage and Protection Board. 3. Joint Sealants: Sonneborn; Sonolastic sealant. 4. Accessories, etc.: Primer, crack sealers, reinforcing mesh, expansion joint covers, cants, etc. as recommended and provided by waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent finish surfaces from damage or discoloring resulting from work described in this section. B. Protect waterproof membrane from damage, including UV light exposure. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Factory representative shall inspect the full installation of membrane waterproofing installation. B. Warranty shall contain language that states that factory representative inspected the complete installation and that the installation complies with manufacturer's installation requirements. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Prepare wall surface per manufacturer's requirements and installation details. 1. Install damproofing to green concrete. 2. Install sealants and/or pre-sealing at all joints and footing junctions. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Install waterproof membrane per manufacturer's requirements. B. Lap waterproof membrane on to adjacent surfaces as required by waterproof membrane manufacturer's requirements. C. At all below grade building walls, provide waterproofing system from top of footing extension to level shown on Drawings. D. Install protection board as soon as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install flashing per manufacturer's and Drawing requirements. F. Shield waterproof membrane from exposure to sun light. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 10 00 -2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes insulation, related products, and accessories used for the resistance of heat and sound transfer. B. Work in this Section also includes the furnishing and installation of specified products in a manner that will provide a continuous barrier as required for a completed thermal or acoustical resistant assembly. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 E. Sealants Section 07 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Unfaced glass fiber thermal batt insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type I, non-combustible per ASTM E-136 and have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development rating of 50 per ASTM E-84. B. Kraft faced glass fiber thermal batt insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665,Type II, class C, Kraft vapor barrier shall have a maximum perm rating of 1.00 per ASTM E-96. C. Foil faced glass fiber thermal batt insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665,Type III, class B, and have a maximum flame spread rating of 75 and smoke development rating of 150 per ASTM E-84. Foil vapor barrier shall have a maximum perm rating of .50 per ASTM E-96. D. Flame Spread Rated (FS25) Foil-skrim-kraft faced glass fiber thermal batt insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type III, class A, non-combustible per ASTM E-136 and have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development rating of 50 per ASTM E-84. Foil vapor barrier shall have a maximum perm rating of .10 per ASTM E-96. E. Sound Attenuation glass fiber batt insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type I, non-combustible per ASTM E-136 and have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development rating of 50 per ASTM E-84. F. Unfaced Mineral wool Fire Safing Blankets shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type I, non-combustible per ASTM E-136 and NFPA Standard 220, and have a maximum flame spread rating of 15 and smoke development rating of 0 per ASTM E-84. G. Faced and unfaced rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation boards (both EPS and XPS) shall comply with ASTM C-578. 1. Thermal resistance (R-value) testing per ASTM C-518 at 75 deg. F. 2. Compressive strength testing per ASTM D-1621. 3. Water absorption 1% average sheen tested per ASTM D-2842; 0.1% when tested per ASTM C-272. H. Faced rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation boards with other surfacing materials shall comply with ASTM C-1289. 1. Thermal resistance (R-value) testing per ASTM C-518 at 75 deg. F. 2. Compressive strength testing per ASTM D-1621. 3. Water absorption 1% average sheen tested per ASTM D-2842; 0.1%when tested per ASTM C-272. Faced, rigid glass fiber board acoustic duct liner meeting ASTM C1071 Type II. SECTION 07 21 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION Black scrim bonded facing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 4219. B. All insulation products shall contain a permanent certification label that certifies it to comply with applicable codes and requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.6 FLAME SPREAD A. Flame spread ratings of insulation and facings shall not exceed 25 and smoke development shall not exceed 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 for all insulating materials within floor-ceiling assemblies, walls, crawl spaces or attics. 1. Except: When such materials are installed in concealed spaces of wood frame construction,the flame spread and smoke development limitations do not apply to facings, provided that the facing is installed in direct contact with the exposed surface of the ceiling, floor or wall finish. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Exterior wall insulation: 1. Continuous Rigid: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) per ASTM C578, minimum 25 psi at 10% deformation, minimum R-5 per inch, thickness per Drawings. 2. Wall Cavity: Unfaced fiberglass bait. FS 25. R-value per Drawings. B. Floor insulation: 1. Floor Cavity: Unfaced fiberglass bait. FS 25. R-value per Drawings. C. Below-slab Insulation: Expanded polystyrene(EPS),25 psi minimum D. Roof Insulation: 1. Framing Cavity: Unfaced fiberglass bait. FS 25. R-value per Drawings. 2. Tapered Rigid: See Section 07 54 00. E. Sound Insulation: Sound attenuation glass fiber baits. 1. Walls 3" thickness. F. Foam insulation: Polycell 100, FEB Handy foam sealant or approved. G. Batt insulation fasteners: Zinc or coated wire, or other devices of type approved by the insulation manufacturer. H. Sill sealer Batts: Glass fiber batt, 1" thick. Seam tape Self-adhesive, fiber reinforced, foil faced seam tape. F.S. 25 rated. SECTION 07 21 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION J. Vapor Retarder: Class III vapor retarder(latex or enamel paint) per Section 09 90 00. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Except as otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, install all building insulation in accordance with the current edition of"Fiberglass Building Insulation Application Instructions," publication 3- BL-4992 of the Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corporation. B. Insulate all cracks around doors, windows and sills with sprayed foam insulation. C. Install sill sealer insulation under all exterior wall and party/common wall bottom plates on top of concrete foundation. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BATTS A. Except as otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, install all building batt insulation in accordance with the current edition of"Fiberglass Building Insulation Application Instructions," publication 3- BL-4992 of the Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corporation. B. Fit insulation in all framing spaces, including areas between joists and outside headers with widths and lengths as required to fully bridge space between framing members. All butt joints to be taped. C. If attached to wood studs, place staples no further than 8"apart. For batts installed between roof joists, provide mesh or wire supports as required to prevent insulation from sagging. D. Tape all seams between faced batts. E. Place insulation and vapor barrier to outside of pipes to prevent freezing and fit neatly around and behind electrical boxes. F. Install insulation with vapor retarder toward the heated side of the wall. G. Insulate all cracks around doors, windows and sills with sprayed foam insulation. H. Install sill sealer insulation under all exterior wall bottom plates on top of concrete foundation. I. Acoustical Batt Insulation: Provide sound attenuation blanket at wall and ceiling locations shown on Drawings and listed herein in such a manner as to provide complete acoustic isolation: 1. At all interior walls. Floor to under side of roof/floor above. 3.3 INSTALLATION - RIGID A. Walls: Install at wall locations as shown on the Drawings. Fasten per manufacturer's recommendation for appropriate substrate. B. Tape all seams with manufacturer's self-adhesive tape. 3.4 CLEARANCES A. Insulation shall not be installed within 3 inches of a recessed light fixture, ballast or other heat-generating electrical device, and shall not be so installed above the device as to entrap heat and prevent the free circulation of air unless the fixture is SECTION 07 21 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION otherwise approved for the purpose. Verify with Electrical Lighting Fixture Schedule that all effected fixtures are IC/DC rated for direct contact of insulation. B. Insulation shall not be installed within 3 inches of any metal chimney gas vent or hood. A permanent sleeve of fine wire mesh screen, sheet metal, or other non-combustible material, shall be installed to maintain the required clearances. C. Insulation shall not be installed in a manner that would obstruct opening required for attic ventilation. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 21 00 -4 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes all vapor barriers and retardants for use in wall assemblies requiring an independent exterior vapor barrier and under all interior slab-on-grade (SOG) construction. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 D. Cast in Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 E. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 F. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provision of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Weather-Resistive Membrane (WRB) - Walls 1. Self-adhering, SBS rubberized asphalt compound, integrally laminated to an engineered film, with code approved supporting test data for equal or better performance. a. Primary WRB Henry, BlueskinVP 160 b. Secondary WRB/Skirts/Apron Henry, BlueskinVP 160 c. Sill Flashing Henry, Blueskin SA d. Through Wall Flashing Henry, Blueskin TWF e. Primers Henry, Blueskin Adhesive or Spray Prep. f. Sealant Adhesive Henry, #925 BES Sealant, Polybitume, Air-Bloc 21,or Air- Bloc 21 FR. B. Roofing underlayment WRB 1. See Section 07 54 00. C. Flexible SAM Flashing (Ice and Water Shield) 1. Manufacturer: a. VaproShield, VaproFlashing, self-adhesive membrane. D. Under-Slab Vapor Barrier SECTION 07190 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS 1. Manufacturer: Stego Industries, LLC a. Primary VB: Stego Industries, LLC, Stego Wrap 15-mil Class A. b. Accessories: As recommended by primary VB manufacturer. E. Wall Penetration Flashing 1. Pre-manufactured flashing panel for plumbing, electrical and HVAC penetrations consisting of polyethylene panels with thermoplastic elastomer weatherproof seals. a. Quickflash or approved equal. F. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene, minimum 6 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. WRB —WALLS 1. In general, install WRB underlayment over ALL exterior sheathing materials on walls to provide a vapor breathable, air barrier, waterproof skin from top to bottom of building. 2. Install WRB starting at bottom of wall, overlapping into rough openings, and per Drawings. 3. Layers: a. Frame Walls: (1) layer (lapping 6 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically) b. Corner wrap: Continuous —OR- Double layer, lapping corner a minimum of 24" each side. 4. Opening Protection: a. Install per manufacturer's instructions and as detailed on Drawings in all door and window rough openings. Install in coordination with window manufacturer's window installation instructions ensuring proper weather lapping. 5. Tape all lapped joints per manufacturer's instructions to create a continuous air barrier. B. Ice and Water Shield 1. Install per manufacturer's instructions at all locations shown on Drawings. C. Under-Slab Vapor Retarder 1. Cover entire surface with vapor barrier, lapping all joints 12 inches, using printed control strips on material as guide. 2. Patch all damaged vapor barriers immediately before covering. END OF SECTION SECTION 07190 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing an integral factory preformed and pre-finished metal panel siding system at locations shown on Drawings, flashing, and related items to produce a complete, weatherproof, watertight siding assembly. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 E. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 F. Sealants Section 07 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit copy of warranty exception form. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Provide wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's twenty (20) year warranty against rupture, structural failure or perforation of coating due to corrosion under normal atmospheric conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wall System: 1. Material: a. Base metal: ASTM A792 Zincalume/Galvalume steel in 24 ga thickness. b. Protective Coating: Zincalume per ASTM A792, AZ50. c. Finish: Fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating; Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 / DuraTech. 2. Configuration: Factory preformed panel with color matched exposed fasteners and continuous seam sealant. 1-1/2" thick corrugated with a net coverage of 36". 3. Color: See Drawings. SECTION 07 42 13 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL SIDING 4. Acceptable manufacturers and models: a. AEP Span, Box Rib Wall. B. Flashing and Seals: 1. Seal at the interior head and base with closed cell rubber closures. 2. Door, window flashing, and at all end of panel terminations, continuous pre-formed J track. Match siding panel material. C. Fasteners: 1. Non-corrosive, self-tapping, self-sealing screws as recommended by panel manufacturer, factory applied color to match panel. D. Weather Resistive Barrier: See Section 07 25 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install WRB on all walls per Section 07 25 00. B. Layout and install panels, accessories and closures per manufacturer's requirements. C. Treat or isolate with protective material, any contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic corrosion. D. Install panels true to within 1/16" of true vertical alignment. E. Install all closure and trim accessories to seal system from intrusion of weather or insects in panel corrugations. F. Splice no siding pieces under 40'-0" in length and make joints only over blocking or backing. G. Field cut panel edges shall be treated to prevent corrosion as recommended by panel manufacturer. 3.2 CLEANING A. Installed panels shall be cleaned to remove all swarf. B. Remove trash, debris, equipment and parts from jobsite. C. Replace any damaged panels. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 42 13 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 42 43 COMPOSITE PANEL SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing an integral factory preformed and pre-finished composite panel siding system at locations shown on Drawings including mounting channel/clip system, flashing, and related items to produce a complete, weatherproof, siding assembly. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: all components. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 H. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 C. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 C. Light Gage Metal Framing Section 05 40 00 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 E. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 F. Sealants Section 07 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Provide a site mock-up panel of all mounting and flashing conditions to review with the Architect. If acceptable, the mock-up may remain a part of the work. C. Composite panel manufacturer shall have a minimum 5 years experience in the manufacturing of this product. The fabricator and installer shall be approved by the manufacturer. D. Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details not utilizing a construction sealant at the panel joints that provide a means of concealed drainage with baffles and weeps for water which may accumulate in members of the system. E. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels not to exceed 1/4" in 20'. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. C. Samples 1. Panel System Assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly. 12"x12" minimum. 2. Two samples of each color or finish selected, 3" x 4" minimum. D. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of joints, sealants, and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and accessories. SECTION 07 42 43 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 42 43 COMPOSITE PANEL SIDING 2. Two copies of manufacturer's literature for panel material. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Provide wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00, 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Design Wind Loads - ASCE 7-05. 1. 3 second gust: 95 mph. 2. Wind Exposure Category: B. 3. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Panels: 1. Decorative high-pressure laminates factory bonded to a wood-based fiber and thermosetting resin core. a. Thickness: 10 mm b. Type: Single Sided Decorative f. Fire-Retardant: N/A g. Color: See Drawings. 2. Manufacturer/ System: a. Trespa Meteon B. System type: 1. Custom rain-screen, see Drawings. C. Flashing and Seals: 1. See Sections 07 60 00 and 07 90 00. D. Fasteners: 1. Self-tapping, non-corrosive as recommended by panel manufacturer. E. Weather Resistive Barrier: See Section 07 25 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install WRB and rainscreen drain mat on all walls per Section 07 25 00. B. Install all flashing and sheet metal per Section 07 60 00 and as detailed on the Drawings. C. Install all materials in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved shop drawings. D. Install all closure and trim accessories to seal system from intrusion of insects in panel cavity. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove trash, debris, equipment and parts from jobsite. SECTION 07 42 43 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 42 43 COMPOSITE PANEL SIDING B. Remove masking as soon as possible after installation but only after threat of damage has passed. C. Verify weeps and drainage channels are clear. D. Provide final cleaning per manufacturer's recommendation. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 42 43 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all fiber cement exterior siding and wood exterior trim at locations shown on Drawings. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: fastener size and spacing. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Bidder Designed and Engineered Systems Section 01 33 50 D. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 E. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 F. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 G. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 H. Sealants Section 07 90 00 Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 30 00. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. 1.7 WARRANTY (Fiber Cement Siding and Trim) A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace cementitious siding and soffit that fail(s) in materials within specified warranty period: 1. Siding: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Trim: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DESIGN WIND LOADS: A. Minimum Design Wind Loads - ASCE 7-05. 1. Building Category II. (OSSC) 2. 3 second gust: 95 mph. 3. Wind Exposure Category: B. 4. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. SECTION 07 46 46 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Panel Siding: 1. Type: Fiber-cement per ASTM Standard specification C1186 Grade II, Type A, pre- primed. 2. Style —Vertical Panel: 5/16" x 4' x 8',9',10',12'. Smooth texture. 3. Fasteners: Face nailed, galvanized siding nails: a. Panel: 6d common x 2" long @ 6" edges, 12" field. or 0.092" shank x 2" x 0.225" HD ringshank nail; 6" edges, 8" field. (Installer to verify fasteners with latest edition of manufacturer's evaluation report and compliance with specified wind loading.) 4. Trim Accessories: Fry Reglet. See Drawings. 5. Approved Manufacturers: James Hardie, Hardiepanel HZ10, vertical siding. B. Weather resistive barrier: See Section 07 25 00. C. Rainscreen Furring: See Section 05 40 00. D. Sealants: See Section 07 90 00 and as recommended by panel manufacturer. E. Metal trim accessories: See Drawings. F. Insect screen: Painted aluminum screen barring access to birds and insects. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION, PRIMING & PAINTING A. Manufacture siding in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed specifications. B. Factory apply one coat of primer. C. After installation, apply two coats of paint per Section 09 90 00. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install weather resistive barrier on all walls per Section 07 25 00. B. Install rain screen per Section 07 25 00. C. Install insect screen netting at all locations necessary to restrict the entry of insects to the furring cavity. D. Install all flashing and sheet metal per Section 07 60 00. E. Install all flashing and sheet metal in conformance with siding manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions current as of the time of installation. B. Panel siding: 1. Vertical joints of siding to occur over solid framing. SECTION 07 46 46 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING a. Provide joint flashing per manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Horizontal joints of siding shall have no solid framing, rainscreen wood spacers or panel edge nailing to allow drainage down WRB surface. 3. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8"from panel edges and 2" from panel corners. 4. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finish grade. 6. Fasten per Part 2 above. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 46 46 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 07 54 00 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing a TPO (Thermoplastic polyolefin) Single-Ply Membrane roofing system including roof insulation, flashing, roofing membrane and related items to produce a weatherproof, watertight, guaranteed Class A, Single-Ply assembly. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: all components. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 D. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 E. Joint Sealers Section 07 90 00 F. Precast Concrete Pavers Section 32 14 13 1.3 REFERENCES A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Class "A" fire rating C. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. U.L. Class A fire rating B. Minimum Design Wind Loads - ASCE 7-05. 1. 3 second gust: 95 mph. 2. Wind Exposure Category: B. 3. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. C. Minimum Wind Capacity rating: 1. Underwriter's Laboratory - UL580 / UL 1897: UL Class 60. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum 5 year documented experience. B. Installer: Comply specializing in installation of the Products specified in this section with a minimum 5 year documented experience and, approved by manufacturer. C. Perform all sheet metal work in accordance with SMACNA manual. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Shop Drawings: SECTION 07 54 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 54 00 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING a. Details of all proposed transitions. b. Drainage details. c. Anchorage system. 5. Material samples showing final color and finish. 6. Warranty documentation. 7. Manufacturer's specific documentation of compatibility with green roof systems. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer: Project specific, 20 year transferable no penal sum, non-prorated labor and material warranty for roofing based on design wind loads stated in paragraph 1.4 above. B. Manufacturer's overburden guarantee: Project specific, transferable, written guarantee of overburden protection for a period of twenty (20) years. 100% coverage. C. Installer: 5 year warranty against roofing and flashing installation and water tightness. 1.8 OBSERVATION AND TESTING A. Provide manufacturer on-site observation and/or training as required by roofing warranty stated in paragraph 1.7. B. Provide all testing as required by roofing warranty stated in paragraph 1.7, including but not limited to fastener pullout testing, etc. 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's label intact and legible, in sealed packages. B. Store materials on raised platforms in protected locations from moisture and temperature. C. Do not stack packages more than as recommended by manufacturer. D. Handle materials to prevent damage. E. Do not stock pile materials on the roof deck or cause overloading of the roof deck. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All components utilized in the roofing assembly must be manufactured and supplied by the roofing membrane manufacturer or specifically accepted by the membrane manufacturer. All components must meet the conditions of the manufacturer's system warranty. 1. The membrane manufacturer shall notify the Architect of any conflict in system components specified for resolution to achieve required warranty. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fabric-reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) sheet; .060" thick, white, internal fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet using ASTM D 6878, minimum membrane thickness over the reinforcing scrim (top-ply thickness) shall be nominal .015" thick. Minimum SRI value of 78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: SECTION 07 54 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 54 00 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING a. Johns Manville; b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; c. Firestone Building Products Co.; d. GAF Materials Corporation; e. Other approved equal. B. All roofing materials must be compatible and approved for use with rooftop green roof systems. 2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing: 1. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 60 mils thick minimum, white. 2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based, low VOC per Section 01 61 16. 3. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide termination bars, pourable sealers, cleaners and primers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, expansion joints, T- joint covers, lap sealants, termination bars and reglets, and other accessories for a complete and watertight assembly. 4. Roof Penetrations: Portals Plus, TPO Pipe Portal System at locations shown on Drawings. 5. All metal components of auxiliary materials will be stainless steel or other corrosion resistant metal when approved in advance. 6. All miscellaneous accessories as required by the roofing manufacturer for a complete installation, including special requirements for vegetative roofs. 7. Protection mat: Manufacturer's recommended protection mat for ballast, roof pavers, and/or vegetative roof as required to uphold roofing warranty. 2.4 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resistant, surface-textured walkway pads sourced from membrane roofing system manufacturer. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by or approved by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application of thickness indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3 felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Overall insulation thickness or R-values listed will be obtained utilizing a minimum of two layers of stacked and staggered insulation. 2. Minimum compressive strength of insulation: 25 psi. 3. Insulation fully adhered to concrete roof deck shall be 4'x8' boards. 4. Tapered insulation and cricket insulation shall be factory formed. See Drawings for slopes. C. Adhesives: 1. Insulation adhesives shall be as recommended and supplied by the roofing membrane manufacturer. Low VOC per Section 01 61 16. SECTION 075400 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 54 00 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING 2.6 COVER BOARD A. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177, non-asphaltic coated fiberglass mat faced panel with treated, type X, gypsum core; 1/2" thickness. 1. Products: Georgia-Pacific Corporation; DensDeck Prime roof board. B. Adhesive: Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive; Insulation manufacturer's recommended modified asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach cover board to insulation layers. 2.7 PROTECTION MAT A. Woven or non-woven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. 1. Used in conjunction with roof pavers. See Section 32 14 13. 2.8 ROOFTOP PAVER SYSTEMS A. See Section 32 14 13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Project Conditions: 1. Roofing materials shall not be applied unless proper installation conditions as required by the manufacturer can be maintained. Nor shall materials be applied when water in any form (i.e. rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, etc.) is present on the deck. 2. The roof deck shall be structurally sound to support the live and dead load requirement of roofing system and _sufficiently rigid to support construction traffic. 3. Fill joints between roof decking greater than 1/4" wide. 4. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean roof deck. B. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. C. Notify General Contractor and Architect of any conditions limiting the satisfactory performance of the roofing installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof Deck Insulation 1. Install insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, using specified materials. 2. If applicable, perform fastener pullout tests to verify conformance as required by roofing warranty. B. Cant Strips and transitions. 1. Install manufacturer's recommended transition devices in strict conformance with manufacturer's detail installation drawings and instructions. C. Crickets 1. Install tapered cricket insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, using specified adhesive for substrate, board size, location and thickness. SECTION 07 54 00 - 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 54 00 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING D. Cover Boards 1. Install cover boards in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, using specified adhesive for substrate, board size, location and thickness. E. Membrane 1. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's current published application instructions starting at highest elevation and continuing to lowest. a. Verify orientation with manufacturer when on steel decking. b. All seams shall be overlapped in the direction of the slope in overlap widths recommended by system manufacturer. 2. Adhere or fasten membrane per manufacturer's printed instructions to achieve required performance rating. 3. Weld all seams per manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Base Flashing 1. Provide all edge end and penetration terminations per membrane manufacturer's approved details and utilizing manufacturer's proprietary materials. G. Walkways: 1. Install walkway products at locations indicated on the Drawings. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. H. Protection Mat: 1. At areas of roof pavers, install protection mat in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Guarantee Inspection 1. The installation of the roof is to be supervised and/or reviewed by the manufacturer's representative to satisfy the terms of the Guarantee. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove trash, debris, equipment and parts from jobsite. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Finished roof areas shall be protected from damage by the contractor during construction. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 54 00 - 5 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Flashings: Metal, plastic, or laminated sheets used in walls, or as flashing at perimeter of roofing, curbs, cants, equipment, supports, and at other roof penetrations. 2. Metal accessories and trim: Gutters, downspouts, copings, scuppers, diverters and other weather-protective metal items related to roof or exterior walls. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 D. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 E. Fiber Cement Siding Section 07 46 46 F. Joint Sealants Section 07 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet Metal: ASTM A-653, latest revision. B. Aluminum Sheet Metal: ASTM B-209, latest revision. C. Stainless Steel Sheet Metal: ASTM A-167, latest revision. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B-749, latest revision. E. Aluminum/Zinc Coated Sheet Steel: ASTM A-792, latest revision. F. Solder: ASTM E-32, latest revision. G. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: All products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by one manufacturer, regularly engaged in the reputable manufacture of similar items. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings describing all flashing and sheet metal conditions per the requirements of Section 01 33 00. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. 1.7 WARRANTY A. A two (2)year written warranty shall be furnished for material and workmanship of all parts of building to be made watertight with sheet metal work under normal usage. B. Repair any leaks that may occur at sheet metal work without cost to the Owner. C. Warranty shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 07 60 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal Materials: 1. Flashing: Roll-formed sheet steel per ASTM A525; 24 gage, u.n.o. on Drawings; with 1.25 oz./sq.ft. G90 galvanized coating. Factory pre- finished with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000, factory baked silicon-polyester enamel. 2. Misc. Roof Flashing: See Section 07 54 00. B. Flexible Flashing: See Section 07 25 00. C. Related Materials 1. Penetrations: Pipe and conduit penetrations through roofing to be sealed with an elastomeric preformed or malleable 31b. lead sheet flashing collar compatible with roofing material. 2. Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel. 3. Mastic: Cold-application, flashing cement,compatible w/roofing system. 4. Bituminous Paint: ASTM NA-TAZ .007, Pure Asphalt Company, Chicago, Illinois, or equal, for use where dissimilar metals are in contact or the flashing is within 6" of the ground. Acid and alkali resistant. 5. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60. 6. Other materials: Provide all other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of this work, shall be new, first quality, of their respective kinds. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION / INSTALLATION A. General 1. Form all sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing all molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit, soldering securely. 2. Form sections square, and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance of performance. 3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/2 inch on underside. 4. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of flashings. 5. Where indicated on Drawings, factory pre-form, solder and finish flashing and sheet metal fabrications. B. Installation 1. Install flashings in accordance with manufacture's instructions, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements. 2. Provide all required backing and support necessary for a complete and watertight installation. 3. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. 4. Flash and seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic SECTION 07 60 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL cement. Provide weathertight installation. 5. Place eave edge and gable edge flashing tight with fascia boards, weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. C. Expansion 1. Form, fabricate and install all sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and contraction of the finished work. D. Weatherproofing 1. Finish watertight and weathertight where so required. 2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make all lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3". 5. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow. E. Joints 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40' except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation. F. Nailing 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through the metal. 2. Space all nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead washers. G. Embedment 1. Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and methods described in Section 07 90 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 60 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 84 13 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this section describes the requirements various firestopping systems used to seal miscellaneous penetrations through rated construction assemblies to the passage of heat, smoke and fire. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Sealants Section 07 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Firestopping system shall be an integrated system from one manufacturer and carry an ICC/ICBO or UL approval for the rating required and the condition for which it is intended. B. Underwriters Laboratories fire resistance directory. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and UL ratings. 2. Manufacturer's comprehensive installation instructions and details. 3. Material safety data sheets. 4. ICC/ICBO Evaluation Reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This Specification is written based on the use of"HILTI" products unless otherwise noted. Alternate products will be considered when submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Each class of firestopping shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Unfaced Mineral Wool Fire Safing Insulation. 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C665, Type I. 2. Minimum Density: 4.0 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Fire Rating: ASTM E84, Class I, FS 15, Smoke Dev. 0. 4. Manufacturer/Model: USG Thermafiber Safing Insulation. B. Intumescent Firestopping Caulks, Mortars, Sheets, Wrap strips, and collars: 1. Intumescent Materials: Capable of expanding between 5 to 10 times original sized when exposed to high temperatures with expansion beginning at 250 degrees F. 2. Building Code Approvals: ICC/ICBO Evaluation reports and listing in UL Fire Resistance Directory for intended application and rating. 3. Fire Ratings: As required for F & T through penetration rating required for assembly rating shown on Drawings. SECTION 07 84 13 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 84 13 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 4. General Purpose Firestop Caulking: a. Use: Miscellaneous small metallic and non-metallic penetrations through masonry, concrete, drywall & wood wall and floors. b. Type: One component water based intumescent acrylic dispersion. c. Shore A hardness +/- 35. d. Joint movement range: +/- 5%. e. Expansion rate: 3-5 x original volume. f. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti FS-One High Performance Sealant. 5. Elastomeric Firestop Sealant: (Silicone) a. Use: Wall and floor construction expansion joints to 3". b. Type: One component silicone based. c. Joint movement range: +/- 25%. d. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti CP 601S Sealant. 6. Flexible Firestop Sealant: (Acrylic) a. Use: Wall and floor construction expansion joints to 3". b. Type: One component acrylic based. c. Joint movement range: +/- 10%. d. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti CP 606 Sealant. 7. Trowelable Firestop Compound: a. Use: Medium to large openings with non-combustible pipe or cable. b. Type: Cement based mortar. c. Compressive strength: 360 psi. d. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti FS 635. 8. Intumescent Flexible Blocks: a. Use: Medium to large wall or floor openings with combustible or non- combustible pipe or cable penetration. b. Type: Two component polyurethane foam blocks. c. Expansion rate: 3-5 x original volume. d. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti FS 657. 9. Firestop Collars with Intumescent Inserts: a. Use: Combustible pipe wall and floor penetrations up to 10"diameter. b. Type: Galvanized steel housing with intumescent inserts. c. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti CP 643 & CP 642. 2.3 RELATED PRODUCTS A. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer for each product. Nonstaining. B. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Backing Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. Nonabsorbent and nonstaining. D. Bond preventative Material: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, applicable UL assembly, and ICC/ICBO report to achieve at least the minimum through-penetration rating required by prevailing code for rated assembly penetrated. SECTION 07 84 13 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 84 13 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING B. Joints greater than 3/8" in depth to receive backer rod. C. Cleaning: Clean joint surfaces, using joint cleaner as necessary to be free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust lacquers, latence, release agents, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion of sealant. D. Priming: Apply primer, following manufacturer's instructions when required for joint condition. E. Apply sealants in joints that are completely dry and free of moisture using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width. Make sure sealant is deposited in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets. F. Provide complete sealing of all joints, both interior and exterior,where preventing the penetration of fire is required. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials adjacent to joints to eliminate evidence of spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surface. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 84 13 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 07 90 00 SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this section describes the requirements various joint sealants used on this project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 D. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 E. Fiber Cement Siding Section 07 46 46 F. Window Systems Division 8 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Color samples. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. C. For all sealants not used in mockup, provide 5' long, in-place sample section for architect's approval prior to final application. Coordinate Architect review with regularly scheduled progress meeting. D. Peel Test: Contractor shall perform periodic field adhesion testing of all sealant joints per the following: 1. Test method: ASTM C1193, appendix X1; Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab or; ASTM C 1521, Method A, Tail Procedure. 2. Test frequency: Perform 10 tests for the first 1,000 lineal feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and substrate; perform 1 test for each 1,000 lineal feet thereafter. 3. Verification: Inspect test joints for proper joint fill, dimension, configuration, substrate elongation and adhesion per manufacturer's specifications. 4. Record all test results by date and person testing in a Sealant Field- Adhesion test log. 5. Evaluate test results: Tests revealing proper sealant characteristics and adhesion sill be repaired to original condition. Tests revealing improper characteristics or adhesion will be evidence of failed sealant. Further testing will be conducted to isolate failing conditions. All failed sealant will be removed and new sealant provided that subsequently passes re-testing. 1.6 WARRANTY SECTION 07 90 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 131018-1-13 SECTION 07 90 00 SEALANTS A. Submit written warranty of workmanship against leakage for two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Sealants shall be of the highest available grade for each product type meeting the minimum standards listed below. Sealant installer shall verify suitability of each type for intended application and bonding substrate. Notify architect of unsuitable conditions prior to application. B. Color of sealant to match adjacent finish. Each color and each class of sealant shall be the product of a single manufacturer. C. When available, sealants shall be low VOC per the requirements of Section 01 61 16. 2.2 JOINT SEALANTS - Interior or exterior (unless noted otherwise) A. Elastomeric Sealants: 1. "Type ES-A" (for pedestrian and light -traffic bearing horizontal surfaces): a. Type: Type S, one component or type M, two component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade P, self-leveling. c. Composition: Polyurethane. d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 45. e. Joint movement range: +/- 25% 2. "Type ES-B" (for precast and masonry panel vertical joints) a. Type: Type S, one component or type M, two component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Polyurethane. d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 50. e. Joint movement range: +/- 25% 3. "Type ES-C" (General purpose vertical joints) a. Type: Type S, one component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Polyurethane. d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 50. e. Joint movement range: +/- 25% 4. "Type ES-D" (to join and seal glass, plastic, metal alloys, aluminum) a. Type: Type S, one component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Low modulus neutral cure silicone. d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 20. e. Joint movement range: +100 to -50% 5. "Type ES-E" (for sealing sanitary locations) a. Type: Type S, one component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Mildew resistant silicone d. Shore A hardness: 20 to 30. e. Joint movement range: +/- 25% 6. "Type ES-F" (for fiber cement siding joints) a. Type: Type S, one component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Silyl-terminated polyether. SECTION 07 90 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 90 00 SEALANTS d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 20. e. Joint movement range: +/- 50% B. Elastomeric adhesive/sealers: 1. "Type EA-A" (General purpose adhesive - wood, metal, FRP, plastic) a. Type: Type S, one component or type M, two component. b. Standard: ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, non-sag. c. Composition: Polyurethane. d. Shore A hardness: 15 to 50. e. Joint movement range: +/- 25% C. Caulks: 1. "Type C-1" (Thresholds and neoprene gaskets) a. Type: one component. b. Standard: AAMA 808.3. c. Composition: Butyl Rubber. d. Joint movement range: +/- 5% 2. "Type C-2" (General purpose interior vertical joints) a. Type: one component. b. Standard: ASTM C736 c. Composition: Acrylic latex. d. Joint movement range: +/-7.5%. e. Recovery: 75% per ASTM C736 3. "Type C-3" (Acoustical caulking - interior) a. Type: one component b. Standard: ASTM C919 & C834 c. Composition: Non-hardening polyisobutylene rubber. 4. "Type C-4" (Fire stop caulking - general purpose small penetrations) a. Type: one component b. Standard: UL rated for intended application (verify with manuf.) c. Composition: Water based intumescent acrylic dispersion. d. Shore A hardness: +/-35. e. Joint movement range: +/- 5%. f. Intumescent activation: +/- 250 deg. F. g. Expansion rate: 3-5x original volume. h. Manufacturer/Model: Hilti FS-One High Performance Sealant 2.3 RELATED PRODUCTS A. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer for each product. Non-staining. B. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Backing Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. Non-absorbent and non- staining. D. Bond preventative Material: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Joints greater than 3/8" in depth to receive backer rod. C. Cleaning: Clean joint surfaces, using joint cleaner as necessary to be free of dust, SECTION 07 90 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 07 90 00 SEALANTS dirt, oil, grease, rust lacquers, laitance, release agents, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion of sealant. D. Priming: Apply primer, following manufacturer's instructions when required for joint condition. E. Apply sealants in joints that are completely dry and free of moisture using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width. Make sure sealant is deposited in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets. F. Tool joints to required configuration within 10 minutes of sealant application. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling. G. Provide complete sealing of all joints, both interior and exterior,where preventing the penetration of moisture, air, fire or sound is required, including, but not limited to: 1. Exterior pavement joints 2. Exterior building wall joints 3. Flashing and coping joints 4. Misc. construction joints 5. Interior floor, wall and ceiling joints 6. Utility penetrations 7. Sound walls 8. Fire walls and shafts 9. Wall flashing joints 10. Equipment and isolation joints 11. Food service cabinets and permanent equipment to walls. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials adjacent to joints to eliminate evidence of spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surface. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 90 00 - 4 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 00 Steel Doors & Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors & Frames 08 34 00 Access Doors 08 40 00 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Finished Hardware 08 80 00 Glass & Glazing SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes metal .frames pressed into profiles required for openings for doors, casings, relites and sidelights. All frames shall bear the appropriate labels and certifications as required for their assembly and installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Wood Doors and Frames Section 08 14 00 C. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 D. Glass and Glazing Section 08 80 00 E. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Door and Frames: Comply with CS 242-62, PS PS4-66i and Steel Door Institute Standard SDI-100. Latest revisions of all. C. Labeled Doors and Frames: Comply with all UL Procedures R-3791, R-5493 and R-3821. D. Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware: Comply with ANSI A115, latest revision. E. Door and Frame Performance Test:ANSI Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of finish hardware and for concealed support items. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal performance: (per NFRC) 1. Maximum U-Value: .46 or lower (.80 for entrance doors, .70 for opaque doors) 2. Maximum SHGC: .40 or lower B. Weather performance: 1. Air infiltration: Swinging entrance doors shall be tested for air leakage at 1.57 pounds per square foot (psf) in accordance with ASTM E283. a. Swinging entrance doors: Air leakage shall not exceed 1.00 cubic feet per minute per square foot (cfm/ft2) of door area. 2. Water infiltration: No uncontrolled leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 8 psf. C. Structural performance: 1. Hinged doors: Tested and labeled as conforming to SECTION 08 11 00- 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 or ASTM E330. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials used shall be prime grade, open hearth, cold rolled, full pickled, double annealed, stretcher leveled steel, free from scale, pits, warps or buckles. U.S. Standard Gages. 2.2 HOLLOW METAL - WELDED FRAMES A. Minimum thickness commercial quality cold-rolled steel shall be 16 gauge for all interior frames and 14 gauge for all exterior frames. B. Provide frames bearing a U.L. label, in the openings indicated. C. See Drawings for frame profile and depth.All stops shall be 5/8"minimum projection unless otherwise indicated. D. Exterior frames head and jamb members shall be mitered, set up, arc welded at miters and ground smooth. Provide temporary metal spreaders at bottom of frames to maintain rigidity during construction. E. Interior frames mitered, set up and spot welded at miters. F. Frame anchors shall be manufacturer's standard design for condition encountered. Provide minimum of three wall anchors per jamb along with a floor anchor at the bottom of each jamb. G. All frame anchor fastenings shall be concealed. H. Frames shall be chemically treated for optimum paint adherence and painted with one (1) uniform coat of rust-inhibiting quality primer, oven dried, complying with ASTM S 2247 and ASTM B 117, and ready for paint finish. Frames shall be supplied with factory installed rubber bumpers (silencers), three (3) per jamb, one (1) per head. J. Provide reinforcing: 16 ga. for strikes, 12 ga. for surface closers, 8 ga. for hinges. K. Acceptable manufacturers: Curries, CECO, Fenestra, Steelcraft, Republic or approved equal. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL INTERIOR FRAMES (Knock-Down) A. Frames: 18 gauge steel. B. Casings: Provide steel casings with corner alignment clips. C. Fabrication: 1. All frames formed from cold rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM-A366. 2. Roll form or break frames to standard shapes as shown on drawings. 3. Prepare frames for heat-treated, zinc-plated casing retainer clips. Clips mechanically fastened for secure, properly aligned installation of casing. 4. Provide holes on perimeter of frame for insertion of fasteners. 5. Provide oval alignment slots to allow for insertion of screwdriver to adjust frame. 6. All frames to have 14 gauge hinge-reinforcement plates with extruded tapped holes, for a minimum of 3/16" thread penetration depth. 7. Strikes: Prepare for field applied ASA 4-7/8" as required. 8. Provide standard, field-applied reinforcement for surface mounted hardware. 9. Provide U.L. fire rated frames as shown on drawings. D. Finishes: 1. Factory finish: Impact-resistant, polyester baked enamel. SECTION 08 11 00- 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Steel: Chemically cleaned, bonderized, primed and painted in coils. Galvanize steel prior to painting in any exterior, high humidity, or corrosive area. 3. Provide aerosol touch-up paint for after installation, on-sight repair as recommended by manufacturer. E. Color: 1. Alumatone. F. Trim Style: 1. TA-28 Aluminum, clear anodized. 2. Special Notes: When using Timely TA-28 casing trim, hinges must be 4- 1/2" or 5" only and strikes must be ANSI 4-7/8" only. See Section 08 71 00. G. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Timely Industries or approved equal. 2.4 METAL DOORS A. Fabrication of Standard Exterior Doors: 1. Industry Standard: SDI 100, Grade III. 2. Face Sheets: 16 gage steel. 3. Edges: Seamless. 4. Core: Thermal insulation. 5. Minimum Stile and Rail Width: 5-1/2 inches. 6. Shop Finish: G60 galvanized, bonderized, and primed. 7. Flush Cap At Top of Door: 16 gage steel. B. Insulated 1. Provide insulated core at all exterior doors accessing conditioned interior spaces, U-factor: 0.16. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: 1. Provide clear, sealed insulation glazing material that complies with ASTM E- 774-92 Class A, and required energy code thermal performance standard, and is at least 1"in overall thickness. Door shall be glazed by use of applied PVC glazing beads with EPDM glazing gaskets. The size of the bead shall accommodate the glass thickness. 2. Provide tempered safety glass on lites as designated on the Drawings or required by IBC Chapter 24. D. Tempered Glass: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 1048, Type I (Transparent), Class I (Clear), Quality q3, Glazing Select. 2. Clear Tempered: 1/4 inch thick polished. E. Door Light Stops: 1. Material: 18 gage steel. 2. Profile: Square. 3. Design: Recessed. 4. Finish: Baked prime coat. 5. Acceptable Square Light Stops: FGS 75 by Anemostat. F. Hardware Preparation: 1. Prepare doors to receive hardware in compliance with ANSI A 115. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard reinforcing at hinge pockets, lockset and Iatchset openings, closers, pull bars, panic devices, flush bolts, and surface bolts, complying with ANSI SDI-100, Table V. 3. Prepare non-fire rated single interior door frames to receive three silencers on strike jambs. SECTION 08 11 00- 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Prepare non-fire rated double interior door frames to receive four silencers on head. 5. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements of NFPA 252,with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock-Hersey International, and ICC-ES evaluation report for fire rating indicated on Door Schedule. 6. Furnish frames with manufacturer's standard jamb and floor anchors. 7. Furnish hardware reinforcing to accommodate door hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's product data reviewed by the Architect. B. All finished work must be strong, rigid and neat in appearance. Surfaces shall be smooth, free from defects, warps and buckles, miters well formed and in true alignment. All welds shall be neatly made and ground finish. C. Furnish frames with all hardware per hardware schedule. D. Doors shall be fitted with the specified hardware and shall operate perfectly without bind, sag or looseness. The clearances for doors shall be 3/32 inch at jambs, head and meeting stiles, sills 1/2 inch or as indicated on Drawings. 3/8 inch clearance maximum for U.L. Labeled doors at sills. E. Manufacturer shall mortise, drill, and tap frames for surface mortise or unit type hardware in accordance with templates for the hardware furnished by the hardware supplier. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR FRAMES A. Coordinate installation with other trades to avoid conflict. B. Use pre-fit template door in opening to assure proper alignment and clearances. C. Anchor frame with one drywall screw adjacent to each casing clip. D. Align all parts with proper clearance to assure proper fit, tight miters, and desired performance. E. Provide instruction sheets for all frames, sidelites, and borrowed lites for field use. F. At sound retardant doors, tightly pack frames and rough openings with rockwool insulation or grout solid. Provide extra bracing as required to support heavier doors. G. Frames against concrete or masonry to be grouted solid. 3.4 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR FRAMES A. Install the work of this Section straight and plumb within a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically, rigidly anchoring into position for long life under hard use. Perform all drilling and cutting required. B. Doors and frames shall be installed by others-plumb and in true alignment. C. Frames shall be rigid and securely anchored in place. D. Adjust all fire labeled frames to tolerances required by NFPA 80, Section 2-5.4. SECTION 08 11 00- 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES E. Doors shall be installed in a manner to achieve the intended functional operation and appearance. F. Install labeled doors in compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories requirements for the indicated rating. G. Doors with dents or other defects not repairable will be rejected. H. Frames against concrete or masonry to be grouted solid. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF DOORS: A. Install door hardware and doors after shop and field finishing door and frame assemblies. B. Install fire rated assemblies to meet NFPA Standard No. 80. C. For installation of other doors in metal frames, see Section 08 14 00. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjust clearances and hardware placement for smooth door operation. B. Replace damaged and defective door and frame assemblies. C. Touch up scratched door and frame prime finish paint to match adjacent shop primed surfaces. D. Clean door, hardware, and frame surfaces prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 11 00- 5 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes doors and frames of wood and wood product construction with facing materials of wood veneers, wood products and plastic laminate. All doors shall bear the appropriate labels and certifications from their respective testing agencies, for the assembly in which it is installed. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 D. Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 00 E. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 F. Glass & Glazing Section 08 80 00 G. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standard specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Doors shall comply with applicable provisions of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standards for Wood Doors or the Window and Door Manufacturers Association. C. Doors shall be fabricated to the standards of the Door Hardware Institute. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 5. Test Results to assure conformance with applicable standards. 1.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. A maximum allowable warp or twist of doors shall be 1/4" using the WDMA testing method. Doors not meeting this requirement are subject to rejection. B. The allowable gap at jambs, head and meeting stiles shall be 3/32". Edges of both stiles shall be beveled 1/8" in 2". C. Size tolerances: 1. Thickness: +/-1/16 inch 2. Length: +/-1/16 inch 3. Widths: +/-1/16 inch 4. Prefit widths: +/-1/32 inch D. Squareness Tolerance: diagonal measurement difference shall not exceed 1/8 inch. E. Factory Hardware Preparation Tolerances: 1. Hinges: +/-1/32 inch 2. Lock cut outs: 0 - 1/32 inch F. Stile, rail and core telegraphing not acceptable. SECTION 08 14 00- 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES G. The sill undercut shall be 1/2"or as indicated on Drawings. 3/8"maximum clearance undercut for U.L. label doors. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Furnish a manufacturer's written warranty stating that all doors will be of good materials and workmanship and that doors will be warranted against excessive warpage as follows: 1. Solid Core & Stile & Rail: a. Interior installation - lifetime b. Exterior installation - two (2) years 2. Hollow Core: one (1) year. B. Manufacturer's written warranty shall include rehanging and refinishing of doors. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate door preparation work with finish hardware and hollow metal frame supplier for items to be installed in doors so proper allowances can be made. 1.8 FIRE RATING A. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements of NFPA 252, with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock-Hersey International, and ICC / ICBO evaluation report for fire rating indicated on Door Schedule. B. All fire rated doors and frames to bear permanently affixed label stating fire rating, meeting provisions of IBC Section 715.3.3 and include "S" rating suffix signifying compliance as a smoke and draft requirements of UL 1784. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Wood doors shall be of the sizes, types and designs as shown on the Drawings. 2.2 DOORS A. Flush interior doors, solid core, transparent finished: 1. Grade: AWI Custom 2. Thickness: 1-3/4"; 5 or 7-ply 3. Glue: Type II, water resistant 4. Core: a. Non fire-rated: Particle board, no added urea-formaldehyde, bonded. b. Fire-rated: Mineral fiber, bonded. 5. Face skin: AWI, Plain Sliced, Grade A hardwood wood veneer, Select White Birch. 6. Edge Strips: 1-1/8" min. T&B, 1-3/8" Vert. Birch 7. Glazing: Factory glaze per Section 08 80 00. 8. Fire Rating: Per Drawings. 9. Finish: Transparent finish per Section 09 90 00. B. Stile and Rail interior doors, transparent finished: 1. Grade: AWI Custom 2. Thickness: 1-3/4" 3. Glue: Type II, water resistant 4. Core: Solid stock SECTION 08 14 00- 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 5. Face Skin: AWI, Plain Sliced, Grade A hardwood wood veneer, Select White Birch. 6. Glazing: Factory glaze per Section 08 80 00. 7. Joints: Mortised and tenon. 8. Finish: Transparent finish per Section 09 90 00. C. Flush interior doors, solid core, opaque finished: 1. Grade: AWI Custom 2. Thickness: 1-3/4"; 5 or 7-ply 3. Glue: Type II, water resistant 4. Core: a. Non fire-rated: Particle board, no added urea-formaldehyde, bonded. b. Fire-rated: Mineral fiber, bonded. 5. Face skin: AWI, Plain Sliced, Grade A hardwood wood veneer, Select White Birch. 6. Edge Strips: 1-1/8" min. T&B, 1-3/8"Vert. Birch 7. Glazing: Factory glaze per Section 08 80 00. 8. Fire Rating: Per Drawings. 9. Finish: Paint per Section 09 90 00. D. Stile and Rail interior doors, opaque finished: 1. Grade: AWI Custom 2. Thickness: 1-3/4" 3. Glue: Type II, water resistant 4. Core: Solid stock 5. Face Skin: Paint grade Poplar or other sound, closed grain hardwood. 6. Glazing: Factory glaze per Section 08 80 00. 7. Joints: Mortised and tenon. 8. Finish: Paint per Section 09 90 00. 2.3 WOOD FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Interior: 1. Specie: Paint Grade Poplar, Western Hemlock or other sound, closed grain hardwood. 2. Profile: As indicated on Drawings 3. Grade: AWI Custom 4. Finish: Paint per Section 09 90 00. See Section 01 61 16 for VOC limits. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's product data and as reviewed by the Architect. B. Manufacturer shall machine doors for specified hardware, with the exception of through-bolts, pilot holes for screws, and other similar drilling operations, in accordance with current recommendation and standards of the WDMA and the Door Hardware Institute. C. The utility or structural strength of the door must not be impaired in the fitting of the door, the application of hardware, or cutting and altering the doors for lights, louvers SECTION 08 14 00- 3 The Adrienne-Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS or other special details. 3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle doors under provisions of WDMA amd manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not store wood products in areas subject to direct sunlight. C. HVAC systems shall be operating prior to the delivery and storage of doors. Maintain relative humidity of not less than 25% nor greater than 55%. D. Store all doors and frames in horizontal flat position prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Initial Inspection of Doors: Prior to start of installation of each door, carefully inspect the door and verify: 1. That the door furnished is the proper door for the opening, as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. 2. That the door is in sound condition, unblemished, without warp, twist, bow or other attributes causing it to be rejected upon installation. B. Handling: Carry wood doors, do not drag them. Use extreme care in handling. C. Fitting: Trim all wood doors as necessary to provide a uniform clearance of between 1/8" and 3/16" at jambs and head, and a uniform clearance at the threshold or floor to properly clear the floor covering described on the Finish Schedule in the Drawings. D. Installing: For each door, verify the hardware type as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings and verify that hardware actually supplied is the hardware specified. Using only the specified hinges or butts, and the proper equipment for the purpose, install the door into the opening with the following hinge or butt locations throughout the Work: 1. Top hinge or butt: The center of the hinge or butt not more than 11" below the top of the door. 2. Bottom hinge or butt: The center of the hinge or butt not more than 13" above the finish floor. 3. Intermediate hinge: Equidistant between the top and bottom hinge, butt, or pivot. 3.4 FINISH PREPARATION A. Finish Preparation of Wood Doors: With fine sandpaper,working only in the direction of the grain of the wood, remove all rough edges resulting from door trimming and leave the installed door in condition to receive its final finish. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust door hardware for smooth operation and compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act accessibility provisions. B. Clean all doors, frames and hardware. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 14 00- 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 34 00 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. At locations shown on Drawings or as required by access needs, provide wall or ceiling access doors. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 5. UL listing certification where required to be fire rated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Acudor Products, Inc., or approved equal. B. Model: 1. Standard flush frame: OF-5000 / DW-5040 (drywall) / PS - 5030 (plaster) 2. Recessed frameless: AT-5020 / DW-5015 (drywall) / AP- 5010 (Plaster) 3. Fire rated: FB-5060 / FB-5060-DW (Drywall) C. Size: As required for application. 22" x 30" min. for full body access. D. Door: Flush steel panel - minimum 16 gage. E. Frame: One piece outer steel flange welded to mounting frame. F. Hinge: Continuous, concealed. G. Lock: Cylinder key lock - master keyed. H. Finish: Five (5) stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of gray baked enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 08 34 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 34 00 ACCESS DOORS 3.1 APPLICATION A. Provide access door type as appropriate for condition of installation and final appearance based on following general criteria: 1. General service access in non-public areas: Standard flush. 2. Public areas: Recessed frameless. 3. Fire rated assemblies: Fire rated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install neat and square and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. In all recessed frameless doors provide infill material to match adjacent surfaces. C. Provide two keys per door and five master keys. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 34 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 40 00 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the requirements for the aluminum storefront, entry and window system as indicated on the Drawings. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: all components. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 C. Joint Sealers Section 07 90 00 D. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 E. Glass and Glazing Section 08 80 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. AAMA Storefront and entrance guide specifications manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings of the entire installation. 4. (3) 6" lengths of storefront section with specified finish and color. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Design Wind Loads — ASCE 7-05. 1. Building Category II (OSSC) 2. 3 second gust: 95 mph. 3. Wind Exposure Category: B. 4. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. B. Thermal performance: (per NFRC) 1. Maximum U-Value: .45 or lower (.80 for entrance doors) 2. Maximum SHGC: .40 or lower 3. Shading Coefficient: .46 or lower C. Weather performance: 1. Air infiltration: Curtain wall, storefront glazing, swinging entrance doors and revolving doors shall be tested for air leakage at 1.57 pounds per square foot (psf) in accordance with ASTM E283. a. Curtain wall, storefront glazing: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.3 cubic feet per minute per square foot (cfm/ft2) of fenestration area. SECTION 08 40 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 40 00 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS b. Swinging entrance doors, revolving doors: Air leakage shall not exceed 1.00 cubic feet per minute per square foot (cfm/ft2) of door area. 2. Water infiltration: No uncontrolled leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 8 psf. D. Structural performance: 1. Exterior windows and hinged doors: Tested and labeled as conforming to AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 or ASTM E330. 2. Exterior sliding doors: Tested and labeled as conforming to AAMA/W DMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer: Project specific, five (5) year written warranty from material defects, including related glazing and caulking. Repair and replace defective materials within the warranty period at no expense to the Owner. B. Installer: Two (2) year water-tightness warranty. Repair and replace defective work within the warranty period at no expense to the Owner. C. Warranty shall be dated from date of contract's Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. All entrances and storefront for this work shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2. Entrance and storefront design for this Work is based on products of Kawneer, and the numbers shown are Kawneer numbers. Products shall be those upon which design is based, or an equal submitted as a substitution in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Materials: provide aluminum extruded from 6063-T5 alloy. 1. All materials, including secondary fasteners and accessories shall be aluminum or other non-corrosive material as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Metals of different types shall be isolated using appropriate insulation materials in order to eliminate any electrolytic corrosive action. C. Standard Storefront and Windows: 1. Framing System: Kawneer Trifab VersaGlaze 451T, center set, outside glazed, thermally broken, 2" x 4-1/2". 9 Y 2. Swing Doors: Kawneer 350, Medium Stile. a. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2" b. Top Rail: 3-1/2" c. Bottom Rail: 10" 3. Sliding Doors: Kawneer 990 Sliding Door. 4. Vents: 8225TL ISOLOCK, Projected and Casement. SECTION 08 40 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 40 00 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard as required for complete installation. 6. Hardware: See Section 08 71 00. D. Standard Interior Storefront System: 1. Framing System: Kawneer Trifab VersaGlaze 451, center set, outside glazed, 2" x 4-1/2". 2. Flashing: a. Flashing shall match storefront aluminum finish. 3. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard as required for complete installation. 4. Hardware: See Section 08 71 00. E. Glazing: See Section 08 80 00. F. Hardware: 1. Provide the manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from stainless steel material and of sufficient strength to perform its intended function and meeting CMBSO 1-79, CAWM 300/301. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the hardware being fastened. 2. Provide waterproof seals at all operating hardware assemblies penetrating frame. G. Configurations: 1. See Drawings for window types and configurations. 2. Provide egress windows as indicated on the Drawings and as required by code. 2.2 ALUMINUM FINISH A. AAMA 611 Class I anodized; Dark Bronze Anodized. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of storefront system shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to review of the Architect. 2.4 PERFORMANCE A. Expansion and contraction of the extruded aluminum components shall be provided for throughout the system so as to eliminate any distortion, buckling, opening of the joints or other detrimental effects caused by an ambient temperature range of 125 degrees. B. All window wall units shall be capable of safely supporting a uniformly distributed load according to data in published windload charts and the I.B.C. C. Door corners shall be able to withstand a minimum of 2,000 pounds tension without noticeable deformation. Glass stops for doors shall be snap-on type, with non-stretch vinyl glazing beads. No screws shall be permitted. D. Door jambs shall withstand 1600#pressure in vertical distance of 3" and horizontal distance of 1" from strike so as to prevent violation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General: Shop prefabricate all doors and frames into complete units, verifying all measurements at the job site prior to fabrication. B. Workmanship: 1. Fabricate in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the SECTION 08 40 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 40 00 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS manufacturer's published recommendations. 2. Accurately miter and fit all members to hairline joints. 3. Weld or mechanically fasten along entire line of contact on the unexposed side. 4. No discoloration on the face after fabrication will be acceptable. C. Factory finish all components using manufacturer's standard factory application specifications for product specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install all members with adequate provision for settling, expanding, and contracting to occur without breaking glass. B. Anchoring: Firmly anchor all members, using all anchoring devices required to ensure positive attachment of the members for long life under hard use. C. Protection: 1. Wherever aluminum is in contact with steel, concrete or other material potentially creative of electrolytic action, provide all required permanent isolation of the aluminum by back painting with first quality bituminous paint or by such other isolation as is recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of the work. 3.3 CLEANING UP A. General: Immediately prior to acceptance of the Work, remove all protective materials from the storefront system and clean all exposed members. B. Abrasives: Do not use abrasives or harmful cleaning agents. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 40 00 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work described in this Section includes engineering and fabrication of thermally broken, tubular extruded aluminum windows for proper installation at locations shown on Drawings. B. Provide all aluminum windows and accessories, as shown on Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation. C. Provide factory glazing of all new windows unless otherwise coordinated with General Contractor. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Project Meetings Section 01 31 19 B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Quality Assurance Section 01 43 00 D. Weather Resistive Barriers Section 07 25 00 E. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 F. Joint Sealers Section 07 90 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Comply with General Requirements of AAMA/WDMA 101/1S2/A440-05(American Architectural Manufacturer's Association). Except to extent more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Windows to meet performance standards for: 1. ASTM E 283 Test method for infiltration rate of air leakage through exterior windows, curtain walls, and doors under specified pressure differences across the specimen. 2. ASTM E 330 Test method for structural performance of exterior windows, and doors by uniform static air pressure difference. 3. ASTM E 331 Test method for water penetration of exterior windows, curtain walls, and doors by cyclic static air pressure difference. D. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)U-value determination per 100-97 with amendment Jan. 1, 1999. E. Manufacturer's Published Data 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Design Wind Loads - ASCE 7-05. 1. Building Category II. (OSSC) 2. 3 second gust: 95 mph. 3. Wind Exposure Category: B. 4. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. B. Structural: Windows must meet the minimum Gateway Performance Requirements as established by AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 for the performance class listed. 1. Minimum Performance Class: R 2. Minimum Performance Grade: C-30 C. Thermal performance: (per NFRC) 1. Maximum U-Value: .46 or lower 2. Maximum SHGC: .40 or lower SECTION 08 51 13 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 3. Shading Coefficient: .45 or lower 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit Manufacturer's Product Data and Shop Drawings showing all window types indicated on Drawings or required after field review. C. (2) Extrusion samples in specified finish. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturers 10 year "Commercial" warranty. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Conduct a pre-installation conference as required by Section 01 31 19. B. Construct a mockup as required by Section 01 43 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Windows shall be extruded, 0.060" thick, 6063-T5 tempered aluminum sections thermally broken between interior and exterior w/ integral polyurethane insulator. 2. Frame section design shall be self flashing with a continuous nail flange for exterior installation over a framed rough opening. B. Finish: 1. Anodized, Class II factory-applied finish, minimum 0.4 mils thick. 2. Color: Bronze Anodized. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: 1. Provide the manufacturer's clear, sealed insulation glazing material that complies with ASTM E774 Class A, and required energy code thermal performance standard, and is at least 1" in overall thickness. Under no circumstances will a double glazing system incorporating a removable storm sash be allowed. 2. Sash shall be factory glazed from the exterior by use of applied aluminum glazing beads w/ vinyl seal. The size of the bead shall accommodate the glass thickness. 3. Spacer Bar: PPG Intercept warm-edge stainless steel spacer. 4. Provide tempered safety glass on lites as designated on the Drawings or required by prevailing code. D. Weatherstripping: 1. All operating sash members shall be weatherstripped with manufacturer's standard method. Weatherstripping shall be replaceable without the use of special tools or skills. E. Hardware: 1. Provide the manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from stainless steel SECTION 08 51 13 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS material and of sufficient strength to perform its intended function and meeting CMBSO 1-79, CAWM 300/301. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the hardware being fastened. 2. Provide waterproof seals at all operating hardware assemblies penetrating frame. 3. Provide opening limiting device as required by code. F. Insect Screens: 1. Provide removable insect screen panel black for each operable sash, with replaceable mesh and vinyl retainer spline. G. Configurations: 1. See Drawings for window types and configurations. 2. Provide egress windows as indicated on the Drawings and as required by code. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all weatherstripping, glazing and mounting accessories as needed to provide a complete installation in intended application. B. All metal fasteners, hardware, etc. shall be stainless steel or approved equal. 2.3 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERS A. Milgard Windows, Thermally Improved Aluminum PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General 1. Windows shall be constructed in a neat workmanlike manner. All corners of the frame and sash shall be precision mitered with rigid, mechanically fastened or welded joints. 2. Fabricate window units to comply with indicated standards. Units shall be reglazable without dismantling sash framing. B. Pre-glazed Fabrication: 1. Pre-glaze units at the factory for applications indicated. C. Factory Mulled: 1. Provide factory engineered and fabricated mullions between multiple lights as required for configurations shown on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, accessories, and other window components. B. Windows shall be factory sized to fit in each framed opening so that they are 1/2" smaller than the framed (rough) opening to allow 1/4" clearance on all sides (tolerance + - 1/16"). C. Opening panels must be closed and locked during installation. All windows must be installed level, plumb, and square with 1/4"clearance on all sides with weep holes at bottom. D. Headers must not be nailed. Nail through fin into framing along sides and base. At the head, nails may be placed above fin per manufacturer's written instructions and bent down over fin to allow for header deflection. Full support is required along entire length of sill. SECTION 08 51 13 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS E. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Do not use petroleum distillates. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 51 13 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes all hardware required for proper function, fastening and locking of movable parts shown on Drawings and whether or not listed in the hardware schedule. B. Provide the services of an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant) with technical experience necessary to correctly and efficiently service this hardware contract. Said consultant shall be a member of DHI and shall be available to the Owner or his representative for consultation at all times and shall direct application and final adjustment of all door hardware. C. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: all components. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 C. Custom Cabinetwork Section 06 41 00 D. Steel Doors & Frames Section 08 11 00 E. Wood Doors & Frames Section 08 14 00 F. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront Section 08 40 00 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A All standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. B. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and other Opening Protective; 2010. C. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; NFPA 2009. D. All Door hardware shall meet the Security and Fire Life standards of the local jurisdiction. E. ANSI/ICC A117.1-American National Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2004. F. Hardware Mounting: install hardware at Manufacturer recommended locations or per American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. The types listed are to be used as a guide for quality and operation and not to be construed as a complete list. Detail hardware requirements for each individual situation to suit job conditions. B. The detailing of the hardware requirements shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier. C. Workmanship and finish of hardware shall be free from blemishes and defects. Each item shall be properly wrapped in a separate package distinctly labeled and numbered for each and every opening for which it is intended and in accordance with the Hardware Schedule. D. No later than two (2) weeks after approval of hardware schedule make available to door and frame manufacturers a complete set of required hardware templates and schedules. E. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other SECTION 08 71 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life, and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, sex bolts, toggle bolts, security screws, or other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Furnish all items of hardware not definitely specified or listed but required for completion and proper installation of the work; provide type and quality suitable for service required and comparable to the kind specified for similar use. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. For all submittals comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Complete hardware schedule of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. List hardware for each opening separately in number order, listing quantity, material, finish and manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's catalog information and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specification. 3. Sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of concealed hardware items. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 5. Detailed description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation and interface with other Building Control systems. Submit electrical point to point schematic detail and riser diagram for each system. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All hardware shall be factory warranted, free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after acceptance of the building except: 1. Hydraulic door closers shall carry a factory ten (10) year warranty. Electrified and automatic door operators shall carry a factory two (2) year warranty. 2. Exit devices shall carry a factory three (3) year warranty. 3. Locksets shall carry a factory seven (7) year warranty. 4. Electro mag locks shall carry a factory five (5) year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hardware types and sizes shall be as listed on drawings or as specified herein. B. Closers: Cast iron, handed, with forged arms. All closers sized to an in conformance with factory recommendations. Door closers shall in no case restrict swing of doors, but shall allow door to open as far as conditions permit. List and verify degree of opening for all closers. C. Locksets and Latchsets: Strikes to have extended lip where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. All lock and latch sets to be furnished with box type strikes. Furnish reinforcing units for all metal doors. D. Stops and Holders: Check Drawings for suitability and method of anchorage. Provide door stops or overhead stops wherever a door or an item of hardware on a door might contact a wall or other type of the building construction, or other types as specified. E. Door Silencers: All doors shall receive silencers, except labeled fire doors and SECTION 08 71 00 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE exterior doors, three (3) per single door and four (4) per double door. F. Gasket: Fire rated doors are to receive appropriate rated gasketing as required, or specified herein. For rated wood doors, an intumescent type fire gasket is to be field applied, except for category A wood doors it is furnished concealed behind the door edging by the door manufacturer. G. Butts Hinges: 1-1/2 pair, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inch. per door leaf, unless otherwise noted. H. See Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry and Section 06 41 00, Custom Cabinetry for additional hardware. I. Any substitution in hardware from that specified must be submitted in advance, per Section 01 25 00. 2.2 FINISH A. General finish of all exposed hardware: 626 Satin Chrome 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Butts: Stanley, Lawrence, Hager B. Locks, Latches, Cylinders: Schlage, Kwikset (Grade 2 at interior of residential units, Grade 1 at all public areas, commercial areas and residential unit entries) C. Push Plates, Pull Plates: Quality, BBW, Trimco, Tice D. Kick Plates, Flush Bolts: Quality, BBW, Trimco, Tice E. Closers & Operators LCN F. Stops & Holders: Ives, Glynn Johnson G. Thresholds, Door Bottoms: Pemko, Reese, Rixson,National Guard H. Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese I. Panic Exit Devices: Von Duprin J. Astragal: Pemko K. Barn Door Track and Carriages: Cavilock— CS Wall Mount Track 2.4 KEYS AND KEYING A. It shall be mandatory that keying be done by a registered locksmith for security, Owner's convenience, and permanent keying records maintained by the locksmith. B. Provide 5 master keys and 3 change keys for each lock or as directed by Owner. C. Provide construction cylinders and keying during construction period. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Deliver to the job site all finished hardware for storage in a dry and secure environment, except that which is to be delivered to other Subcontractors as SECTION 08 71 00 - 3 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/8-1-13 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE directed. A complete hardware schedule and installation pamphlets shall accompany the delivery. Deliver all hardware items complete with necessary parts for fitting, installing and as required for proper perfect operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locations: Using only the specified finish hardware, and the proper equipment for the purpose, install all finish hardware in the following locations throughout the Work: 1. Combination push-and-pulls: Centered 40-1/4" above the finish floor. 2. Door pulls on plates: Centered 40-1/4" above the finish floor. 3. Door pulls - sectional: Centered 40-1/4" above the finish floor. 4. Door-closing devices: Install and adjust in strict accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the de- vices. Insofar as practicable, doors opening to or from halls or corridors shall have the closer mounted on the room side of the door. 5. Extension level flush bolts: In the edge of the door. bolt Center to fronts 12" from top edge of the door and 12" from the bottom. 6. Kick plates: On single acting doors: with kick plate on push side. On double-acting doors: with kick plate on both sides 7. Mortise deadlock: Center 60" above finish floor 8. Lever handle locks: Center 40-1/4" above the finish latch strikes: floor 9. Panic exit push pad: Install per directions furnished by manufacturer. 10. Push bars, single: Centered 42" above the finish floor 11. Push plates: Centered 48" above the finish floor 12. Other hardware items, not described above: Install as directed by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove all protective materials and wipe all surfaces clean. Adjust all operative hardware for proper and smooth action. Align all gasket weather stripping for proper fit and use. 3.4 HARDWARE SETS A. See Drawings. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 71 00 -4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide all glass and glazing, complete and in place, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Glazing thickness for exterior applications considered bidder designed and engineered. 1. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Steel Door and Frames Section 08 11 00 D. Wood Doors and Frames Section 08 14 00 E. Aluminum Entrances and Storefront Section 08 40 00 F. Aluminum Windows Section 08 51 13 G. Toilet Accessories Section 10 80 00 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass design: 1. Provide glazing materials capable of withstanding normal thermal, wind, and impact loads without failure. 2. Manufacturer to engineer glass thickness complying with ASTM E 1300 according to design wind load applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings of the entire installation. 4. Glazing details, methods, and sealant requirements. 5. Material samples showing final installation system including sealants and gaskets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. C. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. D. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Glass Association of North America (GANA), unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Glazing Manual. 2. Laminated Glass Design Guide. E. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). F. Tempered Glass: Comply with U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission SECTION 08 80 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING Standard 16 CFR 12-1 and ANSI Z97.1. G. Glazing accessories: American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA). H. All vision glass to be produced by one manufacturer and to have the identical exterior appearance. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with State Building Code Section 2406. B. Fire-Rated Door and Window assemblies: Provide glazing materials complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, for ratings indicated, and tested in accordance with NFPA 252 (doors) and NFPA 257 (windows). 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Notify architect of any significant variation from Contract Documents. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Installer: Provide a written warranty against failure of glazing products due to defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer: Provide the following manufacturer warranties: 1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against failure of hermetic seal. 2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coatings. 3. Laminated Glass: 5 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including defects in edge separation, de-lamination or obstruction of vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed in referenced standard. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS A. Products: Subject to compliance with the following requirements, provide products indicated in Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Acceptable Manufacturer's of primary glass products: 1. Guardian Industries 2. PPG Industries, Inc. C. Coordinate all glazing materials meet the requirements of manufacturer's of supporting components. D. Glass types: 1. Float Glass: ASTM C-1036, Type I, (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class as indicated in the Glass Schedule. 2. Tempered: ASTM C1048, Type I, (transparent glass, flat) Quality q3 (glazing select), class, kind and condition as indicated in the Glass Schedule. 3. Coated Float Glass: ASTM 1376, coated glass complying with requirements indicated in the Glass Schedule and the following: SECTION 08 80 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING a. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) coated float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites. b. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered) coated float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by Building Code. c. Pyrolytic Coated (Low E) Float Glass: Glass with solar reflective metallic oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process. 4. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing), Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh m2 (square), 6.4 mm thick. 5. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, interlayer of clear polyvinyl butyral sheet, as type as indicated in Glass Schedule. 6. Insulating Glass: ASTM E 774, Class A units, complying with requirements in the Glass Schedule and the following: a. Seal: Dual Seal, isobutyl primary with polysulfide secondary. b. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) coated float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites. c. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered) coated float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by Building Code. 7. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class I clear, quality q2 mirror, 1/4" thick, silver coated and hermetically sealed with uniform .0002" coating of electrolytic copper. 8. Fire Rated Glazing: Technical Glass Products (TGP) Firelite Plus, fire rated glazing. Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL certifying it for use in tested and rated fire protective assemblies. a. Fire Protective Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E2074-00 and UL 10B, labeled and listed by UL. E. All sealant products applied under this Section shall comply with VOC limits as required in Section 01 61 16. 2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND SEALANTS A. Use glazing compounds and preformed glazing sealants approved for the application by the glass manufacturer and, except as otherwise specified, conforming to the Glazing Materials portion of the GANA/FGMA Glazing Manual. 1. Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Provide all glazing accessories required to supplement those accessories which accompany the items to be glazed, and as needed to provide a complete installation, including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads, settling blocks, and spacer strips. 1. Glazing Tape: ASTM C 1241 and AAMA 800. 2. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backer: ASTM C 1330, type O. 3. Setting blocks: ASTM C864, EPDM or neoprene rubber unless otherwise required for compatibility with sealer and glazing compounds. 4. Mirror Molding: ASTM A167, type 304 stainless steel, 22 gage. No. 4 finish. SECTION 08 80 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict conformance with referenced standard to sizes required for glazed opening. 1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with referenced standards and requirements of glass and support component manufacturer. 2. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Selection of Glass: Where plate glass is indicated, float glass may be used. 2. Distortion: Cut and install glass with the visible lines or waves running with the horizontal direction. 3. Fix moveable items securely, or in a closed and locked position, until glazing compound has thoroughly set. 4. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40° F. 5. Perform glazing on dry surfaces only. B. Glass setting 1. Items to be glazed shall be shop-glazed or field-glazed with glass of the quality and thickness specified. 2. Prepare surrounds and glass, unless otherwise directed, in conformance with the details and general conditions governing glazing in the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual. 3. Use beads or stops furnished with the items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. 4. All glass to be set with the FGMA recommended clearance and isolation from frame or sash using appropriate setting blocks, spacers, tapes, beads, sealants or compounds. 5. Glass shall be set "flat" with no visible twist, torque, bending or other detrimental induced stress. 6. Provide final sealing of all glazed openings against the penetration of air or water. 7. All wire glass to be set with wire grid running horizontal and vertical. C. Mirrors 1. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide necessary backing and/or concealed fasteners for surface mounting at locations shown on Drawings. 2. Provide s/s edge trim on all mirrors unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications, and prior to acceptance of the work, thoroughly clean all glass and remove all labels, paint spots, putty and other defacements. SECTION 08 80 00 - 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING 3.5 GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-1 (EXTERIOR INSULATED VISION — Clear) 1. Unit Thickness: 1" 2. Interspace/Content: '/z"/ inert gas - as required to meet thermal performance requirements. 3. Indoor Lite: Coated condition C (other coated glass), class 1 (clear)float glass. 4. Outdoor Lite: Coated condition C (other coated glass), class 1 (clear)float glass. Coated on 2nd surface as required to meet performance requirements. 5. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on second or third surface. 6. Performance Standards: a. Winter U-value: 0.45 maximum b. Shading Coefficient: 0.46 maximum c. SHGC: 0.40 maximum 7. Tempered: HS or FT where required by code or condition. B. Glass Type GL-2: (EXTERIOR INSULATED VISION) 1. Specific glass is specified in individual Sections for the component in which it is used. Refer to Sections referenced in part 1.2 above. C. Glass Type GL-3: (INTERIOR SINGLE VISION — Interior Doors & Relites) 1. Thickness: 1/4" minimum single sheet. 2. Type: Clear Float Glass 3. Tempered: Where required by code or condition D. Glass Type GL-4: (MIRRORS) 1. Thickness: 1/4" minimum. 2. Type: Clear per specified standard. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 80 00 - 5 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 28 00 Fiber Reinforced Cement Board 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tile 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 64 00 Wood Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 68 00 Carpeting 09 90 00 Painting SECTION 09 28 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED CEMENT BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes providing fiberglass reinforced cement board panels where indicated on drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Light Gauge Metal Framing Section 05 40 00 B. Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 C. Tile Section 09 30 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. ICC/ICBO listed for required rating of assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. USG -Durock Cement Board; 5/8" thick B. USG -Durock joint reinforcement tape C. USG -Durock steel screw fasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interior: 1. Install on studs with a maximum spacing of 16" o/c. 2. Block all edges. 3. Fasten with bugle head "S" point, corrosion resistant screws through pre-drilled holes at a maximum spacing of 6" o/c all supports. 4. Fill joints with mortar and embed reinforcing mesh. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 28 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the furnishing, installation,joint taping and finishing of gypsum wallboard panels on wood, metal, and solid substrates. B. Work in this section also includes furnishing and installation of direct hung suspended metal furring systems, all wallboard accessories and finishing materials. C. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered components. 1. Bidder designed and engineered components include: all components. 2. Manufacturer shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction, and that system components are appropriate for intended application. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed and Engineered Systems Section 01 33 50 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 D. Painting Section 09 90 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 B. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002, latest revision. C. Installation: ASTM C 840, latest revision D. Conform to code requirements to achieve fire rating of walls, ceilings, ceiling-floor and ceiling-roof assemblies and column and beam protection which require joint taping of gypsum board assemblies, even when finishing is not required for decorative purposes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Moisture Content of Substrate: Do no taping or finishing of gypsum board surfaces until the moisture content of substrate is 15% or less. C. Temperature: Do no taping or finishing of gypsum wallboard surfaces until the interior temperature has been maintained at a minimum of 55 degrees F for a period of at least 24 hours. D. Temporary Heat: Temporary heat for interior work shall be provided as specified under Section 01 56 00. The heat and method shall be sufficient to allow all coats of taping and finishing compound to dry to a maximum of 15% moisture within 72 hours. E. Ventilation: Coordinate the work so that adequate continuous ventilation is provided, in conjunction with temporary heat to insure proper drying. F. Lighting: Do not proceed with the work in any room unless lighting level of 15 candlepower per square foot is available. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces that do not receive board finish. B. Protect all wallboard from weather exposure. SECTION 09 29 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE & MOCKUP A. Contractor shall provide a 36" x 36" area of all wall and ceiling textures on site or as approved by Owner in advance via sample boards, for the Owner's approval of drywall textures throughout the project. Contractor shall schedule this approval so as to not delay the project and ensure approval prior to actual finish application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: 1. General Wallboard: 5/8" thick, per ASTM C-1396, tapered-edge, in 48" minimum widths and in such lengths as will result in the minimum of joints. 2. Fire Resistant: 5/8" thick, Type"X", per ASTM C-1396, tapered-edge, in 48" minimum widths and in such lengths as will result in the minimum of joints. 3. Moisture Resistant: 5/8"thick, per ASTM C-1396, Grade MR, asphalt treated core and water repellent paper face. 4. Exterior Soffit Board: GP ToughRock Fireguard Soffit Board; 5/8"thick,Type "X", per ASTM C-1396, Grade X, Type III, Class 1. B. Joint Tape: Furnished perforated, cross-laminated, reinforced paper. C. Taping Compound: Furnish specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding of tape at board joints compatible with the tape and substrate;do not mix vinyl-base and casein-base formulations for any one coat. D. Finishing Topping Compound: 1. Furnish specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound; do not mix vinyl base and casein-base formulations for any one coat. 2. At textured surfaces; United States Gypsum Company, Texture XII Drywall Surfacer. E. All Purpose Compound: Furnish specifically designed to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound compatible with the tape and substrate. F. Compound Form: Furnish compounds for taping and finishing in either powder or premixed forms, of compatible chemical composition with previous and successive coats of compound applied joints, fasteners, and trim. G. Metal Trim 1. Trims: Furnish trims for corners, expansion joints, exposed edges, edges abutting dissimilar materials and where detailed or noted on the Drawings, specifically designed for such installations, and of type to meet the requirements of the work in this Section and any code requirements for fire ratings to be achieved by the installation or system. 2. Trim Features: Provide hot-dip galvanized 0.0217" nominal thickness (26 gauge). 3. Fry Trim: Extruded aluminum as manufactured by Fry Reglet Co. 4. Casing Beads: Channel shaped with concealed wing not less than 7/8"wide, and an exposed wing. 5. Corner Beads: Provide angle shaped with wings not less than 3/4" wide. Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing shall be folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in a white color. 6. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings shall be angle-shaped with wings SECTION 09 29 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD not less than 3/4"wide. Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing shall be folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color. 7. Continuous soffit vents: Flannery, Inc., extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. See Drawings for locations and specific configurations. H. Acoustical Furring: U.S.G. RC-1 channel or equal. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-taping steel screw fasteners, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for the application involved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. General Use Schedule: See Drawings for specific locations. 1. Non-wet walls and ceilings: General Wallboard. 2. Wet walls and ceilings (all walls with plumbing fixtures within four feet or otherwise susceptible to repeated moisture, restroom/bathroom walls and ceilings, commercial/institutional kitchen walls, shower/dressing rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms): Moisture Resistant Wallboard. 3. Walls receiving Ceramic or stone tiles: Moisture Resistant Wallboard. B. Gypsum Board-General: 1. Install in conformance with ASTM C840. At all locations listed as fire rated assemblies, install gypsum board in strict conformance with assembly listing using proper board layout, fasteners, and finishing specified by the listing. 2. Install the gypsum board with the separate boards in moderate contact with each other but not forced into place. 3. At internal and external corners, conceal the edges of the board by overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. 4. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical corners. 5. Place boards perpendicular to framing wherever practical. 6. Install gypsum boards on ceiling first, then on walls. C. Ceilings: 1. Install the gypsum board to ceilings with the long dimension of the board at right angles to the supporting members, except that board may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting members that are spaced 16" on center, or less, when attachment members are provided at end joints. 2. Install control joints in continuous ceilings at 50 feet on center maximum. D. Walls: 1. Install the gypsum board at right angles to the furring or framing members. Make end joints, where required, over furring or framing members. 2. Stagger end joints in successive corners. Place end joints on opposite sides of partitions on different studs. 3. Drive fasteners in field of panel first, working toward ends and edges. 4. At fire rated exterior walls and interior bearing walls, install gypsum board full height from floor to floor or ceiling structure above, including in floor/ceiling and attic spaces. 5. Install control joints in continuous walls at 30 feet on center maximum. E. Attaching: 1. Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers,spacing SECTION 09 29 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD the screws a minimum of 12" on centers at ceilings and 12" on centers at walls unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide attachment in strict conformance with listing at all fire rated assemblies. 3.2 FINISHING A. Unfinished Walls and Ceilings, PDCA Level 1: 1. Tape embed joints and interior angles in joint compound, panel surfaces free of excess joint compound. 2. Tool marks and joint compound ridges are acceptable. B. Ceramic Tile Finished Walls, PDCA Level 2: 1. Tape embed joints and interior angles in joint compound with one separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 2. Panel surfaces free of excess joint compound. 3. Tool marks and joint compound ridges are acceptable. C. Wall Covering and Paneling Finished Walls, PDCA Level 3: 1. Tape embed joints and interior angles in joint compound with two separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 2. Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and joint compound ridges. D. Painted Walls in Closet, Janitor, Storage, Mechanical, and Electrical Rooms and walls receiving finish texture, PDCA Level 4: 1. Tape embed joints and interior angles in joint compound with 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over joints angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 2. Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and joint compound ridges. E. Painted Walls and Ceiling in All Other Rooms, PDCA Level 5: 1. Tape embed joints and interior angles in joint compound with 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over joints angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 2. Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound, or Latex Flat Sealer to the entire surface. 3. Finish joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and joint compound ridges. 3.3 CLEANING UP A. In addition to the requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications, use all necessary care during execution of this portion of the work to prevent scattering of gypsum board scraps and dust and to prevent tracking of joint and finishing compound onto floor surfaces. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris, and surplus material of this Section. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 29 00 - 4 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 30 00 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installation of vertically and horizontally set tile. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Light Gauge Metal Framing Section 05 40 00 D. Sealants Section 07 90 00 E. Fiberglass Reinforced Cement Board Section 09 28 00 F. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09 29 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation published by the Tile Council of America. B. ANSI Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit product data for each type of tile type. C. Submit product samples of each product type. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, MODELS, COLOR A. See Drawings - Finish Materials Schedule B. Manufacturer's and/or Suppliers to verify all materials specified meet the following standard specifications. 2.2 TILE: A. Ceramic Tile: 1. Standard grade, glazed ceramic tiles meeting ANSI A 137.1. 2. Standard grade, unglazed ceramic tiles meeting ANSI A 137.1. 3. Standard grade, unglazed porcelain tiles meeting ANSI A137.1. B. Natural Stone Tile: 1. Gauged stone tile —within 1/16". 2. See Drawings - Finish Materials Schedule. C. Trims: 1. Full range of inside/outside corner, bullnose top and edge, and transition radius trims. No field fabricated transition or edge pieces allowed. See Drawings for required trim profiles. 2.3 EDGING AND TRANSITIONS: A. Metal edge trims and/or reducer strips shall be SchluterSystems as appropriate for material and condition. All edging and transitions to be ADA compliant. 1. Tile to Concrete: Schluter; RENO-U 2. Tile to Resilient: Schluter; RENO-U 3. Tile to Carpet (lower thickness) Schluter; RENO-TK SECTION 09 30 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 30 00 TILE 4. Tile to Carpet (same thickness) Schluter; SCHIENE B. Material/Finish: Aluminum / Clear anodized. C. Thickness of finish flooring materials and edging/transition model to be coordinated by the Contractor. 2.4 MORTAR & GROUTS A. Thin Set Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: per ANSI A118.1. B. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: per ANSI A118.4. C. Polymer Modified Grout: per ANSI A118.7. 1. Provide color samples for Owner selection. D. Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout: per ANSI A118.8 1. Provide color samples for Owner selection. 2.5 WATERPROOFING & CRACK PREVENTION MEMBRANE A. Mer-Krete Fracture-Guard 7000, RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane, or approved equal. 2.6 SEALERS & RELEASING AGENTS A. StoneTech Professional Grout Release B. StoneTech Professional Grout Sealer for Ceramic Tile 2.7 RELATED ACCESSORIES A. Spacers and clips - as recommended by tile manufacturer. B. Metal edge trims and/or reducer strips — As required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Condition of Surfaces: 1. Surfaces shall be clean, free of cracks, films, oils and curing compounds. 2. Maximum variation of surfaces to receive tile shall be: a. Floors: 1/4" in 10 feet from required plane. b. Walls: 1/4" in 8 feet from required plane. D. Coordinate and level Floor with mortar or compatible leveling compound as required to provide flush transitions between abutting materials of varying thickness. E. Establish and coordinate the location of expansion and/or control joints. 3.2 SUBSTRATE A. Verify conformance of substrate per the following general schedule. See also Drawings. 1. Floor tile: Concrete structural slab, gypsum cement underlayment per Section 03 54 13, or fiberglass reinforced cement board per Section 09 28 00. 2. Wall tile: Fiberglass reinforced cement board per Section 09 SECTION 09 30 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 30 00 TILE 28 00 and/or moisture resistant gypsum wallboard. 3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints at: 1. Interior (dry areas): 24' to 36' in each direction. 2. Interior (wet areas): 12' to 16' in each direction. 3. Where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns or pipes. 4. Directly over control/expansion joints in structural substrate. 5. As shown on Drawings. 3.4 EDGING AND TRANSITIONS A. Provide edging and transition strips at all tile edges where a change in finish flooring material or thickness occurs. B. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. At gypsum cement underlayment substrates, apply waterproofing and crack prevention membrane per manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Tile - General 1. Install tiles in full pieces, center and balance in areas unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on Drawings. 2. Grout Joints: See Drawings. 3. For partial tiles, cut, do not split. 4. Mix all mortar and grouts in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Setting and Grouting: Install in accordance with the following listed specifications: 1. Walls: Latex Portland Cement thin set mortar & grout per ANSI A108.5 and A108.10. a. Over MRGWB: TCA Assembly W243. b. Over Cement Board: TCA Assembly W244. 2. Floors - Ceramic tile: Latex Portland Cement mortar & grout set per ANSI A108.5 and A108.10. a. Over concrete slab: TCA Assembly F113. b. Over Cement Board: TCA Assembly F144. c. Over Gypsum Concrete Underlayment: TCA Assembly F200. D. Cleaning: Clean all grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials are still workable. E. Provide Releaser prior to grouting. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Cover tile with visqueen and plywood to protect while performing adjacent construction work or related activities. B. Protect adjacent surfaces when installing and cleaning tile. 3.7 SEALER A. Provide grout sealer at all tile. 3.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide Owner with extra 2% of each tile type for future repairs. B. Provide 1-101b. bag of each grout color, wrapped in moisture resistant plastic bag. SECTION 09 30 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 30 00 TILE END OF SECTION SECTION 09 30 00 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide acoustical ceiling system complete and in place, including all associated hardware, as shown on Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper installation. Provide required seismic bracing wires, struts and accessories per IBC. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 C. Fire Sprinklers Division 21 D. Mechanical Division 23 E. Electrical Division 26 1.3 STANDARDS A. Acoustical Ceiling Tile 1. Federal Specification SS-S-118B, Class A, latest revision, U.L. 25 or less. 2. Fire Hazard Rating: ASTM E 84-79c, (0-25) B. Suspension System - by hierarchy: 1. 2010 OSSC 2. ASTM C635, ASTM C636, ASTM E 580/E 580M 3. ASCE 7-05, Section 13.5.6 4. CISCA - Guidelines for seismic restraint for direct hung suspended ceiling assemblies - Seismic ones 3 & 4. May 2004. 5. NWCB Field technical bulletin 401- 10/09. C. Suspended Ceiling Load Criteria: 1. Vertical: 4 psf. 2. Lateral: Per Structural Drawings. 3. OSSC T1604.5 Occupancy Category: II 4. Duty Classification: Heavy, per ASTM C-635. 5. Cross Runner Deflection: L/360 max. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 30 00. B. Product data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. System A: Typical 1. Suspension System: a. Suspension System: Shall be a 9/16" exposed tee system. b. Material: Double-web electrogalvanized steel. SECTION 09 51 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS c. Face Dimension: 9/16" x 24" x 24", 48" and 72" exposed tee face. d. Profile: Exposed tee surface and edge angles. e. Color: White, Baked polyester paint. f. Duty rating: Heavy duty system. g. Manufacturer: Armstrong or other approved equal. 2. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: a. 24"x48" acoustical panels. b. Manufacturer/ Model: See Drawings c. Layout/Configurations: See Drawings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUSPENSION - GRID INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install ceiling system per referenced standards. B. Main runners shall be installed 48 inches on center, and be directly suspended by not less than 12 gage galvanized steel wire spaced 48 inches on center along the main runners. Hanger wires shall be wrapped tightly at least 3 full turns. C. Main runners shall be interconnected by cross tees at 24" centers for 24" x 48" modules. Proper length cross tees shall also be installed adjacent to all recessed light fixtures or supply and return diffusers on each side not supported by a main runner. D. Wall angle moldings shall be installed wherever suspension components meet vertical surfaces. E. Provide extra hanger wires at each corner of light fixtures and at all points where tees are interrupted by light fixtures. F. Attachment devices to be of an approved type capable of carrying 5 times the ceiling load (50#). G. Hangers to be plumb or counter splayed and not press against pipe or duct insulation. H. Deflection shall be limited to 1/360 or .133" (1/8") in a 4' span. If the fixture causes a deflection in excess of the 1/8", the fixture shall be independently supported or the grid shall be supplementally supported within 6" of each corner with a #12 wire. I. A fixture installation shall not cause the runners to rotate more than 2° from the vertical (this is the equivalent of a 1/32" out of horizontal for a standard 1" tee). J. Carrying channels and main runners are to be level within 1/8" in 12 feet; leveling is to be performed with hangers taut;, kinks or bends are not be used as a way of leveling. 3.2 SUSPENSION - GRID INSTALLATION LATERAL BRACING REQUIREMENTS: (FOR STANDARD TEE BAR GRIDS WHEN NOT SUPPORTING PARTITIONS) A. Hangers to be a minimum of#12 gage, galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire @ 4' o.c. each way. Hangers to be attached to suspension members and to the support above with a minimum of three turns. Hangers shall not attach to or bend around other material or equipment and shall not be more than 1 in 6 out of plumb without being counter splayed. B. All connection devices shall be of an approved type capable of supporting 100#'s and be secured to the building structure. C. A trapeze or equivalent shall be used where obstructions preclude direct attachment to the structure. Trapeze suspension shall be a minimum of back to SECTION 09 51 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA N . 1 1 -1-1 S o 3 0 / 8 3 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS back 1-1/4" cold rolled channels where spans exceed 48". D. All runners shall be independently supported at the perimeter within 8" of the wall or ceiling discontinuity; the wall angle or closure strip shall not be allowed for this purpose. E. Within 4' of the walls at 12' o.c. in each direction, 4-#12 ga. wires shall be connected within 2" of an intersection of a main runner with a cross runner and splayed 90° from each other at an angle not exceeding 45° from the plane of the ceiling. 1. A strut fastened to the main runner shall be extended to and fastened to the structural members supporting the roof or floor above. The strut shall be adequate to resist the vertical component induced by the wires. 2. Lateral force bracing members shall be spaced a minimum of 6 inches from all horizontal piping or duck work that is not provided with bracing restraints for horizontal forces. Bracing wires shall be attached to the grid and to the structure in such a manner that they can support a design load of not less than 200 pounds or the actual design load, whichever is greater, with a safety factor of 2. F. Members perpendicular to the wall shall be tied together (stabilized) to prevent their spreading. This shall be done immediately adjacent and parallel to the wall. The wall or closure angle shall not be used for this purpose, although to facilitate installation, runners may be attached to the closure angle at two adjacent walls with clearances between the wall and the runner being maintained at the other two walls. G. All light fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspension system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of 100% of the fixture weight in any direction. H. Only intermediate-duty and heavy-duty suspension systems shall be used to support light fixtures. With intermediate-duty suspension systems, the grid members shall have supplemental support within 3" of each corner of the fixture with a #12 ga. hanger. Where heavy-duty suspension systems are used, supplemental support is not required. J. In addition to the above, fixtures or other equipment weighting more than 20# but less than 56# shall have two #12 ga. wires from the housing to the structure above or to other hanger wires. These wires may be slack. Fixtures or other equipment weighing in excess of 56# shall be independently supported with #12 ga. wire at each corner to the structure above. Pendant hung fixtures shall be independently supported with a minimum of one #9 ga. wire. 3.3 LAY-IN PANEL INSTALLATION A. Center and balance areas of tile, if possible. B. An excessive number of cuts shall not be made. Usually, no cuts smaller than half size should be made. Make all cuts on the outer edges of the field. C. Install the tile without jagged or flaked edges. No visible cut edges allowed. D. Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons or other similar devices. E. Install whole tiles wherever possible. The splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. F. Make cutouts for all penetrations of lights, mechanical and fire sprinkler systems. G. At tegular type panels, field cuts shall be cut to a matching tegular profile. Field paint tegular profile to match factory edges. SECTION 09 51 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 3.4 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish an additional 5% of each tile color, size, style and pattern for Owner's use. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Leave all tile clean and free of dust or discoloration. Replace damaged or discolored units at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 51 00 - 4 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 64 00 WOOD FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing a prefinished wood flooring system specified herein at locations shown on Drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Gypsum Concrete Underlayment Section 03 54 13 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications B. Flame Spread, Smoke Developed 1. F.S. less than 75 per ASTM E-84. 2. Smoke density less than 450. 3. Flame Class, HB, U.L.94; self extinguishing 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. C. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and have a minimum 5-years experience in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. D. Moisture testing: For flooring to be installed on concrete slab, provide the following: 1. Prior to installation, the flooring installer, under authorization of the flooring manufacturer will perform slab testing to determine moisture retention in the concrete. 2. Moisture emission is not to exceed 5 lbs. of water per 1000 sq.ft. per 24 hours using the Rubber Manufacturers Association test method. 3. Installation of the flooring will signify acceptance by the installer and manufacturer that the substrate is sufficiently dry to allow proper performance of the flooring in place. E. Humidity and Temperature testing: 1. Provide continuous temperature and humidity testing for 14 days prior to flooring installation. 2. Maintain a temperature range of 55 to 78 degrees F and a humidity range of 35 to 50% for a minimum of 14 days prior to installation. F. Product acclimation: 1. Place wood flooring in areas in which it is to be installed a minimum 14 days prior to installation. 2. Open sealed packages and separate planks to allow for natural adjustments of moisture content. SECTION 09 64 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 64 00 WOOD FLOORING 1.5 WARRANTY A. Minimum manufacturer's 10 year commercial warranty. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00 B. Product data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Manufacturer's warranty. C. Submit product samples of each product type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Engineered Wood Veneer Flooring. 1. 3/16" minimum veneer layer thickness 2. 5/8" minimum overall thickness 3. 4 1/2 minimum width 4. Floating — glueless locking 5. Species: See Drawings 6. Finish: See Drawings B. Manufacturers: 1. See Drawings C. Underlayment: See Section 03 54 13. D. Foam Underlayment: FloorMuffler. E. Transitions, Moldings and Accessories: Provide all transitions, moldings and accessories as required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring materials used, and as approved by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine the areas and conditions under which wood flooring is to be placed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Surface shall be smooth and level to a tolerance of 3/16" in 10'-0" with no more than 1/2" deviation over entire floor area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Substrate: Prior to start of laying of flooring, broom clean or vacuum all surfaces to be covered and inspect the substrate. Start of laying flooring will indicate SECTION 09 64 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 64 00 WOOD FLOORING acceptance of substrate conditions. B. Grind down high spots and/or fill low spots with leveling compound approved by flooring manufacturer that do not meet the required minimum tolerances. C. Concrete sealer: Apply concrete slab sealer if recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. Remove all oils, curing compounds and bond breakers from concrete as recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Grind or sand concrete slabs if recommended by adhesive manufacturer or if required to remove contaminants. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install flooring in strict conformance with Manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. B. General: Install material only after all finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Install flooring using floating floor method with click-type glueless joints. D. Butt consecutive panels and adjacent walls per flooring manufacturer's recommendations. E. Trim all edges with solid stock edge pieces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General 1. Remove surface blemishes from flooring, using neutral type cleaners recommended by the flooring manufacturer. 2. Protect installed flooring from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3. After completion of the Work and just prior to final inspection, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Contractor shall inspect and make necessary adjustments within one month of the time that heat is supplied continuously in finished areas. B. All material that has not been seated in a level plane with surrounding adjacent material shall be replaced. 3.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide Owner with extra 5% of flooring materials for future repairs. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 64 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installation of all resilient flooring and base as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or otherwise needed for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section. B. Work in this Section includes the final top-coating and finishing of materials installed under this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Gypsum Concrete Underlayment Section 03 54 13 D. Carpeting Section 09 68 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. ASTM REFERENCES, FEDERAL REFERENCES 1. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: ASTM 2034 2. Linoleum Tile Flooring: ASTM F 2195 3. Base: F.S. SS-W-40a, Type I Rubber. B. Flame Spread, Smoke Developed 1. F.S. less than 75 per ASTM E-84. 2. Smoke density less than 450. 3. N.B.S. Floor Radiant Panel - Critical Radiant Flux - 7.5. 4. U.L. tunnel test 992. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. C. Moisture, Humidity and pH testing: For flooring to be installed on concrete slab, provide the following: 1. Prior to installation, the flooring installer, under authorization of the flooring manufacturer will perform slab testing to determine moisture retention and pH in the concrete. 2. Moisture emission is not to exceed 3 lbs. of water per 1000 sq.ft. per 24 hours per ASTM F1869, using Calcium Chloride test method OR, a lesser moisture content as required by the manufacturer or installer of the flooring to be installed. 3. Internal relative humidity of the concrete slab shall not exceed 75% when measured per ASTM F2170. 4. Slab shall not exceed a pH value of 10. 5. Installation of the flooring will signify acceptance by the installer and manufacturer that the substrate is sufficiently dry to allow proper performance of the flooring in place. D. Slab Flatness: SECTION 09 65 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 1. Check slab flatness and verify that it meets the requirements of Section 03 35 00. 2. Low spots must be filled and high spots ground to required flatness. 3. Clean all contaminants from slab that would be detrimental to proper installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00 B. Product data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Manufacturer's warranty. C. Submit product samples of each product type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Resilient Linoleum Sheet Flooring: 1. Natural Linseed oil / wood / rosin / jute composition; refer to Reference section of this specification for grade and type. 2. Minimum thickness: a. 0.100" (2.5mm). b. 0.080" (2.0mm). (Only allowed when 0.100" is not available) 3. Manufacturer/style/color: a. Forbo / Marmoleum / See Drawings. 4. Shims: Paper shims. 5. Adhesives: a. Forbo Linoleum L910. b. Forbo epoxy 660 at wet locations (toilets, drains, etc.). c. Forbo recommended seam adhesive. d. All adhesives shall meet VOC requirements of Section 01 61 16. 6. Heat Welding Rods: a. Marmoweld color-matched welding rod. 7. Top Finish: a. Forbo "Topshield" topcoat finish. b. All finishes shall meet VOC requirements of Section 01 61 16. 8. Underlayment: Gypsum Concrete per Section 03 54 13. B. Rubber Base shall be 4" or 6" top set cove, in maximum lengths. 1. Rubber; refer to References section of this specification for grade and type. 2. Manufacturer/style/color: a. See Drawings. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesives shall be a waterproof and stabilized type as recommended by the manufacturer of the approved resilient material. Asphalt emulsions and other non-waterproofed types will not be accepted. Low VOC per Section 01015. SECTION 09 65 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Concrete slab primer shall be a non-staining type as recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient material to be applied over it. D. Concrete slab vapor reduction coating: Koster VAP 1 2000 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials used, and as approved by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring is to be placed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Surface shall be smooth, level, at the required finish elevation, without more than 1/8" in 10'-0" variation from level or slopes shown. 3.2 PREPARATION (Concrete Substrates) A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with patching and leveling compound as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. C. Perform subfloor Calcium Chloride Tests (and Bond Tests) as described in manufacturer's installation guide to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. D. Vacuum clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials. 3.3 PREPARATION (Wood Substrates) A. Install and prepare wood underlayment substrate per Section 06 20 00. B. Vacuum clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials. C. If required by flooring manufacturer, apply substrate primer. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Install all materials provided under this Section in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed installation specifications and details. Where manufacturer's instructions conflict with other requirements herein, notify architect for resolution prior to application. B. Install material only after all finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. SECTION 09 65 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Resilient Linoleum Sheet Flooring: 1. Cut material in lengths and sizes required, minimizing number of seams. 2. Match pattern between adjacent abutting edges and double cutting if recommended by manufacturer. Do not reverse sheets. 3. Lay sheets flat and allow to acclimate prior to adhesive work. 4. Install flooring using the exact system recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 5. Install sheets tight to floor with butt joints less than 1/100" in width. 6. At butt joints between two different thicknesses of material, install paper shim per manufacturer's instructions to bring finished surfaces flush with each other to provide a smooth transition. 6. Heat weld seal seams using products and equipment recommended by manufacturer. 7. At locations scheduled as"Self Cove", provide 6" high self-coves using 7/8" radius wall base fillet strip to form the cove. Terminate the exposed top edge of the cove with a metal binding set in adhesive. Outside and inside corners shall be formed without using metal trim pieces. Adhere cove and cap strike by manufacturer's recommended method. 8. Use necessary floor trim pieces to provide a finish edge and protect edge. D. Resilient Base: 1. Install base to walls, columns, cabinets and permanent fixtures. 2. Install base in maximum lengths available with pre-molded corners. Notch as required to neatly fit around trims at door jambs. 3.5 CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from flooring, using neutral type cleaners recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. Finishing: 1. Provide topcoat finishes per manufacturer's specifications: a. Resilient Linoleum sheet and tile flooring: Manufacturer's topcoat. C. Protection: 1. Protect installed flooring from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.6 ADJUSTMENTS A. Contractor shall inspect and make necessary adjustments within one month of the time that heat is supplied continuously in finished areas. B. All material that has not been seated in a level plane with surrounding adjacent material shall have heat supplied locally and be quickly rolled to the surrounding level of floor material. C. All materials showing broken corners, minor brakes, or fracture lines across surface shall be removed, and new materials substituted. D. All materials showing evidence of debris, not removed prior to installation, shall be removed and new material substituted after cleaning of the sub-surface. 3.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish the Owner with 20 feet of each sheet vinyl type and color used and 20 feet of each color of rubber base used. B. Furnish the Owner with 5% of each resilient tile type and color used. SECTION 09 65 00 - 4 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING END OF SECTION SECTION 09 65 00 - 5 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the furnishing and installation of carpeting and pad including all labor, adhesives, and accessories necessary to completely install all carpet materials in locations shown on Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 C. Gypsum Concrete Underlayment Section 03 54 13 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 E. Resilient Flooring Section 09 65 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when reviewed by the Architect, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. B. Moisture testing: For flooring to be installed on concrete slab, provide the following: 1. Prior to installation, the flooring installer, under authorization of the flooring manufacturer will perform slab testing to determine moisture retention in the concrete. 2. Moisture emission is not to exceed the following limits as tested using the Calcium Chloride test method recommended by the Rubber Manufacturers Association: a. Woven backing: 5 lbs. of water per 1000 sq.ft. per 24 hours. b. Solid rubber backing: 3 lbs. of water per 1000 sq.ft. per 24 hours. 3. Installation of the flooring will signify acceptance by the installer and manufacturer that the substrate is sufficiently dry to allow proper performance of the flooring in place. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Installations shall comply with Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI), Standard No. 105, "Standard Reference Guide for Installation of Residential Textile Floor Covering Materials" and per manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Carpet must carry a CRI Green Label Certification. a. All carpet shall be eligible for recycling by the supplying mill or fiber producer to an existing operational third party certified recycling center. B. Flammability: Carpet, Pad, and accessories shall comply with ethenamine Pill Test DOC-FF-1-70 and/or ASTM D 2859-d76, "Standards for the Surface Flammability of Carpets". C. Flooring Radiant Panel Test:ASRM E 648-78 and/or NFPA 253, Carpet shall have a minimum critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square centimeter. D. Smoke Density Test: NFPA 258 and/or ASTM E 662-83, Carpet shall have a specific optical density (SM) of 450 or less (Flaming). E. Fade Resistance: AATCC 16E-1982, Dark Color: Gray scale rating of 4 or better after 180 standard fading hours as compared to AATCC gray scale for evaluation change in color. Ozone and gas: AATCC 129-1298 rating 3 or better per color SECTION 09 68 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING AATCC transference scale. F. Static Resistance: Provide carpet construction to provide minimum of 3.0 KV resistance for 20 percent relative humidity at 70 degrees F, AATCC 134. G. Tuft Bind: Carpet shall have an average face yarn tuft bind of 20 pounds for the life of the carpet, as tested per ASTM D 1335-67 method. Tuft bind shall not be rendered insufficient by normal cleaning or accidental spillage of water causing a flooded carpet condition. H. Delamination: Primary and secondary backings shall be able to stand up to an average of 8.3 pounds per square inch resistance to separation, as certified by independent testing. Stain Resistance: Carpet shall be of a permanent stain resistant fiber and not only by surface treatments. Carpet shall pass testing of AATCC 175, and be certified to comply with that standard. J. Edge Ravel: When installed with or without edge sealer, carpet shall have no evidence of edge ravel. K. Nylon Fiber Construction: Continuous filament nylon shall be high bulk or textured carpet type yarn with average filament size of 12 denier or coarser. Staple nylon shall be carpet type fiber with an average fiber size of 12 denier or coarser, and of specified fiber length. For level loop carpet, the staple length shall be a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Solution dyed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00 B. Product data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Manufacturer's warranty. C. Submit product samples of each product type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Broadloom: 1. See Drawings. B. Modular Tile: 1. See Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Pad: 6 lb. Rebond. B. Tack Strip: 1" wide x 1/4" thick plywood strip w/ minimum 3 rows of aluminum directional tacks. C. Seam Adhesive shall be carpet seaming adhesive, or an equal recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved carpet. D. Adhesives. E. Transition Strip: extruded bronze. F. Underlayment:Gypsum concrete per Section 03 54 13. SECTION 09 68 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING G. Provide other accessories and materials, required to complete installation. H. Primers: 1. Provide substrate primers as required for proper installation of carpet. Installer shall verify primer compatibility between carpet requirements and substrate. Concrete slab vapor reduction coating: Koster VAP 1 2000 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Immediately prior to installation of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all substrate and remove all oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other items which would adversely affect the bond of adhesive. B. Smoothing: Make all substrata level and free from irregularities. Assure one constant floor height after carpet is installed,grinding high spots and filling low spots as required. C. Provide results of concrete slab moisture tests prior to installation. D. If concrete slab vapor emissions exceed the specified maximum value, apply vapor reduction coating per manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION (Broadloom) A. The Contractor shall install carpeting where indicated. Installation shall be direct glue-down. B. Carpet shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be laid in continuous matching pattern, square with the lines of the room. All seams shall be smoothly and continuously joined utilizing an approved steam-type adhesive backing tape. The final installation shall provide a carpeted surface that is smooth, lays completely flat, without wrinkles, ripples, or surface irregularities. All finished seams shall not be noticeable under normal visual observation. 3.4 INSTALLATION (Broadloom with pad) A. The Contractor shall install pad and carpeting where indicated. Installation shall be stretch-in method per CRI 105 published standards. B. Carpet shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be laid in continuous matching pattern, square with the lines of the room. All seams shall be smoothly and continuously joined utilizing an approved steam-type adhesive backing tape. The final installation shall provide a carpeted surface that is smooth, lays completely flat, without wrinkles, ripples, or surface irregularities. All finished seams shall not be noticeable under normal visual observation. 3.5 INSTALLATION (Tile) A. The Contractor shall install carpeting where indicated. Installation shall be direct glue-down. B. Carpet shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the SECTION 09 68 00 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING manufacturer and shall be laid in a pattern as directed by the Architect, square with the lines of the room.The final installation shall provide a carpeted surface that is smooth, lays completely flat,without wrinkles, ripples,or surface irregularities. All finished seams shall not be noticeable under normal visual observation. 3.6 CLEAN-UP A. Thoroughly clean all carpet surfaces prior to final acceptance of the carpeted areas by Owner, and inspectors. B. Installed carpet shall be free of spots, dirt or soil, and shall be without tears, frays or pulls. C. Any damage to paint, walls, woodwork, doors, etc., during installation shall be the responsibility of the carpet contractor to repair. D. No installation will be accepted until inspected by representatives of the Owner and carpet installer. E. All carpeted areas shall be adequately ventilated after installation to assure the elimination of odors from carpet or associated installation materials. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of foot traffic, maintaining intact until carpeted space is accepted by Owner. 3.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish the Owner with 20 square feet of each flooring type and color used. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 68 00 - 4 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work described in this section describes the requirements for applying paint, stain, or other emulsions on designated surfaces. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Priming and finishing of certain surfaces are specified to be factory performed or installer performed under pertinent other Sections. B. Submittals Section 01 33 00 C. Special Requirements Section 01 61 16 D. Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00 E. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 F. Custom Cabinetwork Section 06 41 00 G. Sealants Section 07 90 00 H. Doors & Door Frames Division 8 1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Do not include painting which is specified under other Sections to be completed by those trades. B. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. C. Pre-finished metal surfaces of forged steel, anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, brass,copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be specified herein. D. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operations, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. E. Do not paint over any required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. The term "paint", as used herein, means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Architectural Specification Manual as published by Painting Contractors of America (PDCA). B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. C. Qualifications of Workmen: 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of the work of this Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements of the materials and the methods needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. 2. Provide adequate numbers of workmen skilled in the necessary crafts and properly informed of the methods and materials to be used. 3. In acceptance or rejection of the work of this Section,the Architect will make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. SECTION 09 90 00 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING D. Transparent Finished Interior Woodwork: Shall be finished to the standards of American Woodwork Institute(AWI)Section 5, Finishing, Premium grade, regardless of where actually finished. E. Paint Coordination 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. 3. Provide additional primers, sealers or fillers, depending on substrate to be finished, as required for proper application of finish coat specified, whether listed herein or not. 4. Upon request,furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. 5. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove the primer and re-prime as required. 6. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coating supplied under other Sections. F. Relative Humidity testing: For floor paint to be applied on concrete slab, provide the following: 1. Internal relative humidity of the concrete slab shall not exceed 80% when measured per ASTM F2170. 2. Application of the floor paint will signify acceptance by the applicator that the substrate is sufficiently dry to allow proper performance of the paint in place. 1.6 LOW VOC COMPLIANCE A. When available, all products used under this Section shall meet the following limitations for emission of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). 1. See Section 01 61 16 — Special Requirements — Sustainable Building Practices. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver paint materials to the job site in sealed, original labeled containers, each bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. B. Storage of Materials: Provide proper storage to prevent damage to,and deterioration of, paint materials. 1.8 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage caused by this Work. Make good any damage caused by failure to provide suitable protection, but not any damage caused by other trades. B. Removal of Flammable Rubbish: Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and daily remove from site. C. Coordinate the work with other trades that they remove all miscellaneous hardware prior to starting work under this Section. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Products List: Before ordering, submit detailed list of materials proposed for use on work. C. Drawdowns: SECTION 09 90 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING 1. Submit drawdowns prepared with type of paint and application specified, samples not less than 8-1/2" x 12" in size. D. Finish material samples: 1. Provide actual finished material samples of transparent finished wood. E. Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes and textures are approved. Retain approved samples to be used as the quality standard for final finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All painting products applied under this Section shall comply with VOC limits as required in Section 01 61 16. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS A. Design is based on use of paint products by manufacturers listed below and other materials of those manufacturers are named in the Painting Schedule. B. General: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard best-grade product will not be acceptable. C. Durability: Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not use paint materials which will not withstand normal washing as required to remove pencil marks, ink ordinary soil, and similar material without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage. D. Colors and Glosses: See the Finish Materials Schedule on the Drawings. The architect has selected the colors to be used in the various types of paint specified and will be the sole judge of acceptability of the various glosses obtained from the materials proposed to be used in the Work. E. Undercoats and Thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to the recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system. F. Standards 1. Provide paint materials which meet or exceed the standards listed for each application in the Painting Schedule in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Furnish coatings ready-mixed unless otherwise specified, except field mix coatings which are in paste or powder form, or to be field catalyzed, in accordance with the directions of its manufacturer. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint& Stains(General): Paints- Benjamin Moore, Sherwin Williams, Miller, Rodda, Glidden Professional, Tnemec, Olympic, Cabots, Sikkens, Penofin or approved substitution. B. Gypsum board primer (over tape joints and patches) and over patches on other walls: pigmented shellac or pigmented PVA. 2.4 PAINT TYPES SCHEDULE A. Exterior Coatings 1. Elastomeric wall paint (CMU): 1st Coat: Acrylic Primer/Filler as required by substrate SECTION 09 90 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING 2nd Coat: Acrylic based, silicone-enhanced acrylic polymer, weatherproofing colored coating. Minimum 40 perms per ASTM E 96,wet cup method. No cracking per ASTM C 1305. 14-18 wet mils. Velvet (MPI Gloss Level 2) 3rd Coat: Acrylic based, silicone-enhanced acrylic polymer, weatherproofing colored coating. Minimum 40 perms per ASTM E 96,wet cup method. No cracking per ASTM C 1305. 14-18 wet mils. Velvet (MPI Gloss Level 2) 2. Wall paint (Fiber Cement and wood siding): 1st Coat: Acrylic Primer/Filler as required by substrate 2nd Coat: 100% Exterior Acrylic Latex-Velvet (MPI Gloss Level 2) 3rd Coat: 100% Exterior Acrylic Latex—Velvet (MPI Gloss Level 2) 3. Wood transparent stained: 1st Coat: Alkyd oil based, UV block,Semi-transparent penetrating stain 2nd Coat: Alkyd oil based, UV block,Semi-transparent penetrating stain 4. Painted Metal: 1st Coat: Pretreatment Primer 2nd Coat: Exterior Acrylic DTM Enamel 3rd Coat: Exterior Acrylic DTM Enamel B. Interior Coatings: 1. General wall paint: 1st Coat: Pigmented Shellac or PVA sealer 2nd Coat: Acrylic Latex - Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) 3rd Coat: Acrylic Latex - Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) 2. General ceiling paint: 1st Coat: Pigmented Shellac or PVA sealer 2nd Coat: Acrylic Latex - Flat (MPI Gloss Level 1) 3rd Coat: Acrylic Latex - Flat (MPI Gloss Level 1) 3. Painted metals: 1st Coat: See Section 05 50 00. 2nd Coat: Exterior Acrylic DTM Enamel 3rd Coat: Exterior Acrylic DTM Enamel 4. Stainless Steel and Aluminum: No coating. 5. Opaque finished wood: 1st Coat: Waterborne Interior Alkyd Primer 2nd Coat: Waterborne Interior Alkyd — Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) . 3rd Coat: Waterborne Interior Alkyd — Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) 6. Transparent finish wood: AWI TR-6, Polyurethane, Satin (MPI Gloss Level 4) C. Coverage: 1. The intent of the above coating schedule is to provide a thorough, uniform, durable coating of the specified paint. It is the responsibility of the applicator to install each product at rates appropriate to the substrate and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide good coverage. The above schedule shall be considered the minimum application required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SECTION 09 90 00 -4 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING A. Do no exterior work if surface moisture from any source is present or expected before applied paints can cure. B. Do no work if temperature extremes are in excess of those recommended by manufacturers. in no case below minimum temperature of 45° F. C. Do no work on surfaces receiving less than 15 candlepower per square foot lighting levels. D. Provide adequate ventilation to materials receiving coatings per manufacturer's requirement for proper drying. 3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Before starting work in this Section, inspect all surfaces to receive coatings and verify their condition is suitable to receive work under this Section. B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect. Commencement of work will signify acceptance of existing conditions. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Prior to beginning work, mask or otherwise protect adjacent finished surfaces. B. Maintain pedestrian access and required egress paths during all phases of work. 3.4 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES A. Prepare surfaces to receive scheduled work under this Section as hereinafter set forth, and as supplemented by the Painting Specification Manual, latest edition. B. Interior Wood: 1. AW I Section 5. 2. Surfaces are to have been cleaned of dirt and contamination by other trades. Wipe off dust and minor grit prior to prime and subsequent coats. 3. Fill all nail holes and fine cracks with filler prior to sanding. C. Gypsum Board (Walls and Ceilings) 1. Surfaces are to be crack-free, properly finished,textured where required and left clean by other trades. 2. Remove any minor subsequent contamination, dust and dirt. 3. If surface defects appear after prime coating, have defects repaired by the drywall trade; after defects are corrected, proceed with finish painting again using primer over repaired areas. D. Steel and Iron 1. At areas not shop primed or at shop primed surfaces field welded: a. Grind smooth all welds. Remove all rust and scale by power tool clean to bare metal [SSPC-SP 11],or abrasive blasting to SSPC-SP5 commercial grade of cleanliness. 2. Galvanized or Zinc Coated metal surfaces: Remove surface contamination, wash metal with phosphoric acid or approved solution, or apply one coat of etching type primer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1. Prepare metal surfaces as specified above for "Steel" and "Galvanized Surfaces" and as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted. 2. Prepare pre-finished surfaces of electrical panel boards as specified above for "Steel". 3.5 PREPARATION OF PRE-PAINTED SURFACES A. Metal: 1. Remove all loose, peeling, flaking or scaling paint by scraping, chipping and SECTION 09 90 00 - 5 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING sanding. 2. Feather back all rough paint edges and weathered wood to sound surfaces by sanding. 3. In extreme cases, remove old paint completely and treat as new. 4. Spot-prime bare areas as though they were new. 5. Remove the gloss from old painted surfaces, sand with proper grade sandpaper, use a wire brush, or use a liquid deglossing compound. 3.6 APPLICATION A. Apply paint or finish by methods generally accepted by the trade to achieve approved finishes, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. In multiple coat work, provide each coat of paint of slightly different color than preceding coat. C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. E. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. F. Tint filler to match stain where clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has set,working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface. G. To achieve the minimum dry thickness the following formula will be accepted: 1. If coating "Volume Solids" (as specified by product manufacturer) is 100% then one gallon will cover 1,600 square feet at one mil dry film thickness (DFT), or 800 square feet at two mils DFT, or 400 square feet at four mils DFT. Reduced volume solids will reduce coverage proportionately to achieve same dry film thickness. 2. On average, minimum of two to four mils thickness per coat is required. 3.7 COLOR SCHEDULE: A. See Drawings. When colors are not listed on the drawings, submit manufacturer's color selection chart to Architect for color selection. B. Actual paint color selection subject to change. Final selection to be determined during submittal process per part 1.9 above. 3.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Submit, in original unopened containers, one gallon of each top coat for touch up purposes. Label for positive identification. Store where directed. 3.9 CLEAN-UP/TOUCH-UP A. Touch up any blemishes on painted surface. Sand surface and refinish per specifications if necessary. B. Clean adjacent surfaces (or replace finish materials if necessary) of all paint materials or blemishes that resulted during execution of Work in this Section. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 90 00 - 6 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Identifying Plaques and Signage 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 30 00 Fireplaces 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 55 00 Mailboxes SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFYING PLAQUES & SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing all non-lighted plaques for locations listed herein and on the Drawings. B. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing all vinyl applied letters and signage for locations listed herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Shop layout drawings of all graphics. 5. Submit manufacturer's color selection charts. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. All identifying plaques will conform to all Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Guidelines Braille B. All identifying plaques will contain text in English. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNAGE - Interior A. Plaques: 1. Background Material: 1/8" thick Charcoal Grey Rowmark. 2. Attachment: 3M VHB tape on back. 3. Text: 1/32" thick raised Satin White Rowmark ADA compliant applique text with corresponding clear bead braille per ANSI A117.1. 4. Graphics: a. Font: Helvetica Regular b. Size: 5/8" tall minimum. 5. Provide the following: a. Qty. (2); "RESTROOM" w/ ADA symbol; 6"x8" b. Qty. (6); "EXIT"; 6"x8" 6. Verify all plaque text with Owner. Verify installation locations with Owner. B. Vinyl Applied Letters and Symbols: 1. Material: Face adhesive vinyl, black. 2. Text & Graphics: Helvetica Regular. 3. Locations: a. Elevator machine room door: "ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM"; Qty. 1; 1-1/2" b. Roof access door: "ROOF ACCESS"; Qty. 1; 1-1/2" SECTION 10 14 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFYING PLAQUES & SIGNAGE c. See Drawings for additional locations, specific dimensions and layout. C. Cut Metal Lettering: (Unit entry door numbering) 1. 3" high x 1/4" thick water jet cut stainless steel letters w/ concealed mounting studs as required for substrate. 2. Finish: Clear Acrylic Lacquer topcoat sealer. 3. Font: To be selected by Architect. 4. See Drawings. 2.2 SIGNAGE - Exterior A. Vinyl Applied Letters and Symbols: 1. Material: Face adhesive vinyl, white. 2. Text & Graphics: See Drawings 3. Locations: a. Entrance doors: International HC symbol. 6"x6"; Qty. (3). b. Lobby Entrance doors: Street Address. 5" c. See Drawings for additional locations, specific dimensions and layout. B. Cut Metal Lettering: 1. Material: 2"thick aluminum with a powder coated finish. 2. Attachment: a. Canopy: Concealed mounting studs. See Drawings. 3. Font: To be determined. 4. Text & Graphics: a. Qty. (1); "The Adrienne"; 18" high. 5. See Drawings for locations, specific dimensions and layout. C. Monument Sign: 1. Provide an allowance of$5,000.00. Design to be determined. D. Wall Mounted Signage: 1. Materials: a. Substrate: 0.80" thick cut aluminum panel. 2. Locations: a. Fire Dept. Conn.: 6"x10"; with engineering grade (EG) retro- reflective sheeting. 6" high lettering with a 1" stroke. Text: "FDC". Red background with white lettering and a white border. Qty. (1). b. See Drawings for additional locations, specific dimensions and layout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's product data approved by the Architect. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have SECTION 10 14 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFYING PLAQUES & SIGNAGE been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lettering level and plumb. B. Plaques: 1. Mount with center of the plaque at 5'-0" off floor, within 3" of the door on the latch or strike side. END OF SECTION SECTION 10 14 00 -3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes providing prefabricated accessories for use in conjunction with toilets, vanities and service areas. Provide blocking to support all owner provided accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Glass and Glazing Section 08 80 00 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting construction. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head fasteners with finish matching the accessory. B. Finish: All accessory items shall be 304 stainless steel with satin finish. C. All accessories in restrooms shall meet IBC Chapter 11 requirements for Handicap access. D. Alternate products and manufacturers will be considered for use when submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 25 00. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick 2. Bradley 3. Or approved equal 2.3 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. See Drawings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessory units in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units requiring handicap access at recommended mounting heights per state handicap accessibility requirements. Other items per manufacturer's SECTION 10 28 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES recommendations. C. All accessories shall be installed with sufficient strength, together with anchorage, to sustain a dead weight of 250 pounds for five minutes at any point. D. Grab bars shall be installed with sufficient strength, together with anchorage, to sustain a dead weight of 250 pounds for five minutes at any point. 3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Carefully adjust accessories and leave in perfect working order. B. Clean finished surfaces and leave free from any imperfections. END OF SECTION • SECTION 10 28 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 10 30 00 FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this section describes the requirements for fireplaces on this project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings of the entire installation. 4. Color selection charts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mailboxes: 1. Manufacturer: Heat & Glo 2. Model: SL-550TRS 3. BTU/Hour Input: 18,200 — 27,300 4. Type: Slimline gas fireplace insert. 5. Venting: Direct, horizontal. 6. Finish: To be selected from manufacturer's standard color range. 7. Locations: See Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Clean exposed surfaces after installation of site furnishings. END OF SECTION SECTION 10 30 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installing portable fire extinguishers, cabinets, wall brackets and Fire Department Knox Boxes. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 4. Color samples of manufacturer's standard color range. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical (Qty. per Drawings): 10 pound capacity, U.L. Rating 4A-80BC with service tag attached. Cosmic 10E by J.L. Industries. 2.2 CABINETS & MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Cabinets (Qty. per Drawings): J.L. Industries, Ambassador series, steel #1017. 1. Cabinet type: Semi-Recessed, 3" rolled edge. 2. Exterior finish: powder coated steel, white. 3. Interior tub: powder coated steel, white. 4. Door style: Vertical Duo door w/tempered glass glazing and Saf-t-lok 5. Pull handle: ADAC flush pull handle 6. Lettering: Die-cut red vinyl, vertical, "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" 2.3 FD KEY BOX A. Knox-Box Model 3200 series w/hinged door and recessed mounting kit 3290. (Verify location with Fire Department.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation of Fire Extinguisher Brackets: 1. Install fire extinguisher brackets on walls at 40 inches above the floor. 2. Install fire extinguisher cabinets at locations shown with top of cabinet no more than 60 inches above the floor and with handle no more than 54 SECTION 10 44 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS inches above the floor. 2. Screw anchor brackets to adjacent substrate as recommended by bracket manufacturer. B. Location of Fire Extinguishers: 1. Install fire extinguishers and cabinets at locations indicated on Drawings. Verify locations with Owner and Fire Marshall. C. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Replace damaged and defective fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extinguisher brackets, and fire extinguishers. 2. Clean door glazing and fire extinguisher cabinet interior and exterior surfaces prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 104400 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 10 55 00 MAILBOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this section describes the requirements for mailboxes on this project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings of the entire installation. 4. Color selection charts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mailboxes: 1. Manufacturer: AF Florence 2. Model: Versatile 4CIT2-9; 9 standard boxes, 2 parcel boxes and 1 outgoing box. 3. Type: Wall mounted, front loading. 4. Finish: Dark Bronze. 5. Locations: See Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Clean exposed surfaces after installation of site furnishings. END OF SECTION SECTION 10 55 00 - 1 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 Residential Appliances SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and final installation of residential kitchen and/or laundry equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Plumbing Division 22 C. Mechanical Division 23 D. Electrical Division 26 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. B. Provide complete list of all accessories available with specified project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Appliances A. Commercial Space— First Floor: 1. Refrigerator: a. (Qty. 1) GE, side-by-side with freezer below, 22.0 cu. ft., Energy Star, stainless steel, ice maker, water& ice dispenser. PFSS2MJYSS 2. Dishwasher: a. (Qty. 1) GE, 24", Energy Star, stainless steel, hidden controls. GLDT696DSS 3. Under-counter Refrigerator: a. (Qty. 1) Frigidaire, under-counter, 4.4 cu. ft., black. FFPH44M4LB B. Residential Units — Second and Third Floors: 1. Refrigerator: a. (Qty. 8) GE, side-by-side with freezer below, 22.0 cu. ft., Energy Star, stainless steel, ice maker, water& ice dispenser. PFSS2MJYSS 2. Dishwasher: a. (Qty. 8) GE, 24", Energy Star, stainless steel, hidden controls. GLDT696DSS 3. Range: a. (Qty. 8) GE Profile, 30" slide-in, gas, front controls, ADA compliant, stainless steel SECTION 11 31 00 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PGS975SEPSS 4. Microwave/Hood: a. (Qty. 8) GE Profile, 30", 2.1 c.f., 1000 watts, stainless steel. PGS975SEPSS 5. Washer: a. (Qty. 8) GE,4.8 c.f., front loading, 120 V, Energy Star, metallic. GFWR4805FMC 6. Dryer: a. (Qty. 8) GE, 8.3 c.f., front loading, gas, metallic. GFDR485GFMC PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. Confirm with Owner exact locations prior to installation to ensure coordination with fixtures. B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct the conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. END OF SECTION SECTION 11 31 00 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 21 00 Window Coverings 12 48 19 Entrance Floor Grating SECTION 12 21 00 WINDOW COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installation of roller blinds at following locations: 1. See Drawings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Aluminum Entrances and Storefront Section 08 40 00 C. Aluminum Windows Section 08 51 13 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Sufficient data required to demonstrate compliance with all specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings of the entire installation. 4. Color selection charts. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. BL-1 Roller Shades 1. Manufacturer: Springs Window Fashions (SWF Contract) 2. Model: Solar Shading Systems — R8 Manual Shade. 3. Mounting: Inside mount with fascia panel. 4. Shade Fabric: a. Typical: 5% , to be selected from manufacturer's standard color range. 2.2 SIZE & CONFIGURATION A. Provide individual shades at all window lights. (Do not gang multiple lights) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. Confirm with Owner exact locations prior to installation to ensure coordination with fixtures. SECTION 12 21 00- 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 1 8-1-13 SECTION 12 21 00 WINDOW COVERINGS B. Install level and plumb and in good working condition per manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION SECTION 12 21 00- 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 12 48 19 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes providing recessed walk-off floor grating, floor matting and perimeter frame. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Concrete Section 03 30 00 C. Finish Flooring See Division 9 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Samples and product data of all products provided under this Section. C. Submit shop drawings detailing all perimeter frame conditions per the requirements of Section 01 33 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Grating: 1-13/16" deep, slip resistant aluminum entrance grating system with hidden hold down conforming to ADA requirements for slip resistance and penetration. 1. Pedigrid G1, 6105-T5 aluminum rails meeting ASTM B 221. 2. Tread Insert: To be selected from standard color range. 3. Coefficient of Friction , Anti-slip surface: Minimum of 0.60. 4. UL listed slip resistant. 5. 6061-T6 aluminum key lock bars meeting ASTM B 221. 6. Recessed Level Base Frame: Pedigrid LBDP, 1-3/16" x 1-13/16" tall bronze anodized aluminum perimeter frame for recessed concrete embedment. With drain pan. No drain. 7. Manufacturer: a. Pedigrid b. Other approved equal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION — Floor grating and perimeter frame. A. Install per manufacturer's instructions. 1. Frame and drain pan: Concealed hold-downs. 2. Recessed concrete slab; depth and location per Drawings. END OF SECTION SECTION 12 48 19 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 20 00 Passenger Elevators SECTION 14 20 00 PASSENGER ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the furnishing and installation of a complete passenger elevator system in place, tested and approved as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Work in this Section shall also include the securing of all required permits and approvals by governing authorities. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Concrete Section 03 30 00 C. Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 E. Through Penetration Firestopping Section 07 84 13 F. Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 G. Fire Sprinklers Division 21 H. Plumbing Division 22 HVAC Division 23 J. Electrical Division 26 K. Communications Division 27 L. Fire Alarm Division 28 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. B. Comply with Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (ASME/ANSI A17.1), National Electric Code (ANSI/NFPA No. 70), Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), and all applicable State and Municipal Codes, including all revisions and authorized changes in effect locally on the date of this specification. C. All system components shall be from one elevator system manufacturer. D. Comply with all State and Local Jurisdiction elevator codes and requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following shop drawings and submittals in compliance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 2. Shop drawings and installation details for specific application. 1.5 HANDICAP COMPLIANCE A. Operational system shall comply in all regards with current State handicap accessibility requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The equipment installed shall be warranted for a period of one (1) full year from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include the repair or replacement of all defective materials or equipment. 1.7 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT SECTION 14 20 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 14 20 00 PASSENGER ELEVATORS A. Provide with bid a one (1) year maintenance and call back service agreement. Maintenance and Service Agreement shall consist of periodic examinations of the equipment, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in proper operation, except such adjustments, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse or any other causes beyond the elevator contractors control. All work shall be done by trained personnel during regular working hours of the trade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Elevator system shall be an above-ground, twinpost, 1-stage type with remotely located pumping unit, storage tank and controller assembly. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Specification based on ThyssenKrupp B. Model: Endura 35 A 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Function 1. Type: Above-ground, twinpost, 1-stage 2. Capacity: 3,500 lbs. 3 Speed: 110 FPM. 4. Travel: See Drawings. 5. Landings: See Drawings. 6. Door operation: Side, single slide, automatic. 7. Leveling: Two-way. 8. Motion control: Across the line solid state starting. 9. Door detectors: Electronic zone type B. Car 1. Minimum size: 6'-8" x 5'-5" x 7'-11" 2. Door size: 3'-6" x 7'-0". 3. Door finish: Stainless steel. 4. Door returns/threshold: Stainless steel. 5. Door sills: Extruded aluminum. 6. Hoistway entrance: Satin stainless steel. 7. Wall finish: High pressure plastic laminate. Color to be selected by Owner. 8. Floor finish: See finish schedule on Drawings. 9. Ceiling: Standard baked enamel suspended frame with white translucent light diffusers. 10. Hoistway access: Hinged ceiling hatch. 11. Handrail: Flat 2"x1/4" stainless steel. 12. Base: Powder coated steel — Black. 13. Bumper Pads: Pads and buttons 3 walls. 14. Front Return and Fixtures: Column type return, brushed stainless steel front, traditional fixtures. C. Signals 1. Manufacturer's Classic package - Car position indicator, illuminated car and landing pushbuttons, car riding lantern with audible signals. SECTION 14 20 00 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 14 20 00 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 2. Audible and tactile signals meeting handicap accessibility requirements. 3. Green illumination. No substitutions. D. Special features 1. Fire service 2. Emergency lights 3. Cab fan E. Pumping unit 1. Per manufacturer, voltage to be determined. F. Oil reservoir tank 1. Welded steel tank with motor/pump mounts, valves, and controller as self contained unit on sound and shock isolation frame. 2. Oil to be Non-toxic, Chevron Clarity Hydraulic Oil AW ISO 32. G. Controller 1. Electro-magnetic and or electronic type. 2. Manual reset overload relay. 3. Stall override. Will return car to lower level in the event of any malfunction of system or power supply and allow manual door opening. If activated, requires manual reset at controller. 4. Keyed access to basement level. H. Muffler 1. Blow out proof, in-line, oil line pulse muffler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of system to be done in strict conformance with Manufacturer's product data as approved by the architect and all governing codes. B. Coordinate installation and inspections with all State and Local Jurisdiction officials. 3.2 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation, provide all operation and safety tests and secure all operating permits from governing authorities. Provide owner copies of all test results and original certificate of operation. 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. As part of this contract provide twelve months maintenance from the date of substantial completion of the building as outline in paragraph 1.7 above. END OF SECTION SECTION 14 20 00 - 3 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Suppression Systems—Bidder Designed SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - Bidder Designed PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes all materials and labor necessary as required to provide complete, functioning systems as outlined by the Drawings and herein and, per all prevailing codes. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems Included: 1. Fire Sprinkler System NFPA 13: (at commercial spaces) a. A complete automatic fire sprinkler system meeting current code requirements for building occupancy. b. System shall include all site utility extensions required to serve new demands. 2. Fire Sprinkler System NFPA 13R: (at residential spaces) a. A complete automatic fire sprinkler system meeting current code requirements for building occupancy. b. System shall include all site utility extensions required to serve new demands. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fire Sprinkler System shall include all alarm and notification equipment complete. SECTION 21 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - Bidder Designed PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Final test systems installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne— Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing Systems— Bidder Designed SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS - Bidder Designed PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes all materials and labor necessary as required to provide complete, functioning systems as outlined by the Drawings and herein and, per all prevailing codes. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems Included: 1. Domestic Plumbing: a. A complete domestic water, sanitary and storm sewer delivery system as required for a complete, functioning system and based on fixture layout shown on Drawings. b. System shall include all site utility extensions required to serve new demands. 2. Natural Gas: a. A complete natural gas delivery system as required for a complete, functioning system and based on fixture layout shown on Drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Plumbing System: 1. Provide all materials, equipment and fixtures for a domestic water, sanitary and storm sewer delivery system as required for a complete, functioning system and based on fixture layout shown on Drawings. SECTION 22 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS - Bidder Designed a. All water piping to be copper. A polyethylene tubing system may be substituted with Owner's approval. b. Waste piping to be cast iron. 2. Toilets at commercial spaces shall be flush valve type. Toilets within residential units shall be tank type. 3. All plumbing fixtures to be white porcelain china or enameled cast iron. 4. All faucets and drains to be chrome cast brass/bronze or equal and include all basket strainers. 5. Hose bibs to be frost proof. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Provide final hook up of all kitchen equipment. C. Final test systems installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC Systems — Bidder Designed SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATION &AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS-Bidder Designed PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes all materials and labor necessary as required to provide complete, functioning systems as outlined by the Drawings and herein and, per all prevailing codes. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems Included: 1. HVAC: a. Complete gas fired, rooftop units, forced air heating and cooling system. Each residential unit and commercial space will require a separate and independent system. b. Bathroom exhaust systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. HVAC Systems: 1. Minimum design temperatures per ASHRAE design standards. a. Heating: 70F DB Inside Design 10F DB Outside Design 2. Provide equipment and wiring as needed for thermostats. 3. Minimum efficiency factors: a. Heating 80% AFUE SECTION 23 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310/ 8-1-13 SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS-Bidder Designed PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Provide final hook up of all kitchen equipment. C. Final test systems installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical Systems — Bidder Designed SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - Bidder Design PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installation of new system components as required to provide a complete, functioning system as outlined by the Architectural Drawings and herein. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems included: 1. Electrical Service: A complete service and distribution system of 120/240v electrical power, outlets and switching, complete lighting system based on architect's layout and including final lamping, exhaust fans, and final hookup of all electrical equipment. a. Each residential unit and commercial space shall be metered separately. 2. Emergency and egress lighting systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. See architectural Drawings for schematic fixture layouts and types. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure SECTION 26 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - Bidder Design adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Final test system installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Communications Systems— Bidder Designed SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Bidder Design PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installation of new system components as required to provide a complete, functioning system as outlined by the Architectural Drawings and herein. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems included: 1. Data and Communication: Provide complete data, voice and CATV systems. High definition and Broadband capable. 2. Communication for elevator: Provide complete voice system as required by code and elevator manufacturer. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. See architectural Drawings for schematic fixture layouts and types. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. SECTION 27 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Bidder Design 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Final test system installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 27 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 00 00 Electronic Safety and Security Systems — Bidder Designed SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS - Bidder Design PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installation of new system components as required to provide a complete, functioning system as outlined by the Architectural Drawings and herein. B. Work in this Section includes bidder designed and engineered systems. 1. Bidder shall provide all engineering required; for final sizing to meet specifications, and code requirements of permit jurisdiction. 2. On all Bidder Designed work, the Contractor shall provide complete design and documentation as required for submission to and approval of Architect and/or Engineer of Record, Governing Building Departments or Other Authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. C. Work includes all final testing and adjustment. D. Systems included: 1. Local fire detection alarm system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Bidder Designed Systems Section 01 33 50 1.3 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force and shall govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEMATICS A. Drawings are diagrammatic for intent, complimentary to the Architectural drawings not intended to show all features of work. Install material not dimensioned on drawings in a manner to provide a symmetrical appearance. Do not scale drawings for exact equipment locations. Review drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown thereon. Field verification of dimensions, locations and levels is directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. See architectural Drawings for schematic fixture layouts and types. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Install in accordance with prevailing code and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. SECTION 28 00 00 - 1 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS - Bidder Design B. Final test system installed under this contract, make final adjustment and provide owner with all closeout material per Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION SECTION 28 00 00 - 2 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 14 13 Precast Concrete Pavers SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work in this Section includes the forming, reinforcing, casting and finishing and shipping to the jobsite of all precast concrete components. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals Section 01 33 00 B. Single-Ply Roofing Section 07 54 00 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01 42 19. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's information on all components to be used in precast product including: 1. Concrete mix design. 2. Form materials. 3. Accessories. C. Samples: 1. 12"x12" by appropriate thickness of each finish surface type and color. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Show in-place location, fabrication details, plans, elevations, anchorages, reinforcing details, dimensions, finishes, relationship to adjacent materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Lightweight Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lightweight concrete units, specifically designed for use as roof ballast; grooved back, with four-way drainage capability; beveled, doweled, or otherwise profiled; and as follows: 1. Product: Roof drainage pavers w/ bi-directional drainage channels. 2. Color: To be selected from standard range of colors. 3. Size: Nominal 24" x 24"x 2" thick. 4. Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi. 5. Installation: Direct placement on protection layer as required by Section 07 54 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate precast architectural concrete units with manufacturing and testing procedures, casting recommendations, and dimensional tolerances as specified in ACI 533, unless otherwise specified herein or shown on Drawings. SECTION 32 14 13 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS B. Fabricate in accordance with approved shop drawings. C. Reinforcement to comply with CRSI manual of Standard Practice and ACI 318. Reinforce architectural precast units to resist handling, transportation, erection and final structural loading. D. Comply with ACI 533 for measuring, mixing, transporting and placement of mix for applicable panel size relative to aggregate size. E. Consolidate and cure per ACI 533. F. Permanently mark units as to final in-place location and exposure. 3.2 DELIVERY A. Deliver precast units to job-site as directed by General Contractor and/or installation Sub-Contractor. B. Provide placement plans indicating unit marks of individual panels, lifting directions, and individual unit weights. 3.3 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting of the Work will indicate acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Layout paver walkways in locations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Place pavers only on protection layer. C. Ensure pavers are interlocked together to prevent shifting. D. Shim pavers as required to prevent pavers from rocking on roof surface. 3.5 FINISH TOLERANCES A. Finish all surfaces to the following tolerances: 1. Roof Paver Surface: Maximum 3/8" deviation under a 10' straightedge. END OF SECTION SECTION 32 14 13 - 2 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 46 13 Foundation Drainage Piping SECTION 33 46 13 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes the requirements for the installation of: 1. Foundation Drainage System 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Soils Investigation Section 02 30 00 B. Plumbing Division 22 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit project record documents for foundation drainage systems. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Obtain permits and pay fees required by regulatory agencies to connect drain lines to underground drainage systems. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Coordinate the following required test: 1. Exfiltration Testing: a. Provide water test for water exfiltration of installed non-perforated drain pipe. b. Test in large sections before covering above the spring line. c. Continue to monitor water test levels during backfilling and compacting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. PE, Polyethylene Drain Tubing: (foundation drain and piping) 1. Industry Standard: ASTM F 405. 2. Type: Corrugated, slotted with drain filter and non-perforated. 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 4. Nominal Diameters: 4 inches. 5. Acceptable Tubing: ADS Drain Guard by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. or Agri-Flow by Hancor or approved equal. B. Soil Accessories: 1. Bedding Aggregate: See Soils Investigation. 2. Drainage Aggregate: See Soils Investigation. 3. Nonwoven Drainage Filter Fabric: See Soils Investigation. C. Tracer Wire: 1. Size: No. 18, insulated. 2. Insulation Color: Green. PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 33 46 13 - 1 The Adrienne—Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 /8-1-13 SECTION 33 46 13 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Preparation: 1. Trench soil to dimensions required for installation, inspection, and backfill compaction around drain lines. 2. Install PVC pipe sleeves under walks and paving as indicated on Drawings for future irrigation lines. 3. Fill non-perforated drain line trenches with bedding aggregates to height required for 0.5 percent minimum continuous slope, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. B. Installation of Drainage Systems: 1. Install independent foundation and crawl space drainage systems,complying with Appendix in ASTM F 628. 2. Install perforated drain lines at foundations complying with installation procedures in ASTM D 2321. 3. Install non-perforated drain lines at foundations, walls, and holding basins, complying with installation procedures in ASTM D 2321. 4. Place foundation drain lines on 4" minimum thick gravel bed and fill per Section 02200 to not less than 8" below finish grade. Top of drain tubing shall be 12"minimum below finished grade(non-traffic bearing). No puddling allowed over drain lines. 5. Grade foundation drains to provide a positive minimum continuous downhill fall of 0.5%. Slope in each direction around the building from a single high point to the low point at each backwater valve location. Grade rain leader drain lines to provide a positive minimum downhill fall of 1.0%. 6. Install non-perforated drain piping from downspouts to storm sewer connection. Provide cleanout at downspout connection points. Stub drain piping 8"above grade, aligned with downspout and provide pre-formed vinyl downspout boots matching downspout profile. 7. Provide a continuous system of perforated foundation drain piping around entire building perimeter. Wrap piping with filter fabric. Transition to non perforated line within 24"of foundation wall and increase slope from 0.5%to 1.0% to backwater valve assembly location shown on Drawings. 8. Connect non-perforated drain lines to backwater preventer where indicated on Drawings and then to onsite storm drainage system. 9. Complete joints in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. 10. Check complete piping to assure joints are intact and piping drains properly before cover. C. Testing: 1. Provide water test for water exfiltration of installed non-perforated drain pipe. 2. Test in large sections before covering above the spring line. 3. Continue to monitor water test levels during backfilling and compacting. D. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Repair defective lines and components. 2. Excavate and recompact backfill where settlement damages site improvements. 3. Repair walks, paving,and site improvements damaged by backfill settlement. 4. Remove excess soil materials from paving, walk, and landscape areas as soon as backfilling is complete. SECTION 33 46 13 - 2 The Adrienne —Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13 SECTION 33 46 13 FOUNDATION and RAIN LEADER DRAINAGE PIPING END OF SECTION SECTION 33 46 13 - 3 The Adrienne — Tigard, OR SEA No. 1310 / 8-1-13